Pioneer DVD Recorder DVR 545H S User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 2 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.  
Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly.  
After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.  
IMPORTANT  
CAUTION  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,  
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to  
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR  
CAUTION:  
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC  
The exclamation point within an equilateral  
triangle is intended to alert the user to the  
presence of important operating and  
"dangerous voltage" within the product's  
enclosure that may be of sufficient  
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric  
shock to persons.  
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS  
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED  
SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the  
literature accompanying the appliance.  
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following  
section carefully.  
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire  
or shock hazard, do not place any container filed  
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or  
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain  
The voltage of the available power supply differs  
according to country or region. Be sure that the  
power supply voltage of the area where this unit  
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V  
or moisture.  
D3-4-2-1-3_A_En  
or 120 V) written on the rear panel.  
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En  
CAUTION  
This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product  
contains a laser diode higher than Class 1.  
To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers or  
attempt to gain access to the rear of the product.  
Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.  
The following caution label appears on your unit.  
Location: top of the unit  
VRW2262 - A  
CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.  
RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B QUAND OUVERT. ÉVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU.  
KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING. UNDGÅ UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING.  
CAUTION  
ATTENTION  
ADVARSEL  
VARNING  
KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSÄTTA DIG FÖR STRÅLEN.  
BEI GEÖFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERÄTEINNEREN VORHANDEN.  
NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZEN!  
VORSICHT  
CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACIÓN LÁSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICIÓN A LOS RAYOS LÁSER.  
AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.  
PRECAUCIÓN  
VARO!  
D3-4-2-1-8_B_En  
WARNING  
This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive  
(73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives  
(89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and  
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked  
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the  
equipment.  
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En  
93/68/EEC).  
D3-4-2-1-9a_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 3 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used  
electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling.  
Private households in the 25 member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to  
designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one).  
For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal.  
By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential  
negative effects on the environment and human health.  
K058_En  
Operating Environment  
CAUTION  
Operating environment temperature and humidity:  
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH  
(cooling vents not blocked)  
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not  
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.  
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect  
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from  
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,  
make sure the unit has been installed so that the  
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC  
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,  
the power cord should also be unplugged from the  
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time  
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in  
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or  
strong artificial light)  
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En  
VENTILATION CAUTION  
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space  
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat  
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and  
10 cm at each side).  
(for example, when on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En  
WARNING  
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for  
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the  
product, and to protect it from overheating. To  
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be  
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,  
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the  
This product is for general household purposes. Any  
failure due to use for other than household purposes  
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a  
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which  
requires repair will be charged for even during the  
warranty period.  
K041_En  
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.  
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En  
POWER-CORD CAUTION  
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC  
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed  
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and  
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of  
this unit should be performed only by qualified  
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the  
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make  
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.  
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the  
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power  
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a  
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a  
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the  
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other  
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they  
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord  
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check  
the power cord once in a while. When you find it  
The equipment should be disconnected by removing  
the mains plug from the wall socket when left  
unused for a long period of time (for example, when  
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized  
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En  
on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 4 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
Contents  
01 Before you start  
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Putting the batteries in the remote  
control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Using the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Disc / content format playback  
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . 12  
Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . 13  
06 Recording  
About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
About HDD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . 57  
Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Setting the picture quality/recording  
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Simultaneous recording and playback  
(Chase Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Recording from an external component . 67  
Playing your recordings on other DVD  
players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . 70  
02 Connecting up  
Rear panel connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Using other types of audio/video output . 17  
Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver  
or digital terrestrial receiver. . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Connecting an external decoder box (1) . 20  
Connecting an external decoder box (2) . 21  
Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver . . 22  
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . 24  
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
07 Playback  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the  
contents of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Scanning discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . 78  
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . 81  
Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks . . 82  
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Displaying disc information on-screen . . 83  
03 Controls and displays  
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
04 Getting started  
Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system . . 35  
08 Playing and recording from a DV  
camcorder (DVR-645H-S)  
05 Using the GUIDE Plus+™  
electronic program guide  
The GUIDE Plus+™ system. . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ system . . . . . . 40  
Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
GUIDE Plus+™ FAQ and  
Playing from a DV camcorder. . . . . . . . . 85  
Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . 85  
DV video setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 5 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
09 Editing  
Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
The Disc Navigator screen. . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
16 The Initial Setup menu  
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . 132  
Selecting other languages for language  
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
10 Copying and backup  
17 Additional information  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Using disc backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Minimum copying times. . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
On-screen displays and recorder  
displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . 158  
Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
11 Using the Jukebox  
Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Copying files from a USB device . . . . . . 112  
Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . 112  
Editing Jukebox albums . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
12 The PhotoViewer (DVR-645H-S)  
Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Playing a slideshow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Importing files to the HDD. . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Importing files from a USB device . . . . . 119  
Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW . 119  
Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
13 The PhotoViewer (DVR-545H-S)  
Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Playing a slideshow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
14 The Disc Setup menu  
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Finalize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
15 The Video Adjust menu  
Setting the picture quality for TV and  
external inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Setting the picture quality for disc  
playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 6 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
01  
Before you start  
CBhaepfteor 1re you start  
• Don’t use different kinds of batteries  
together—although they may look  
similar, different batteries may have  
different voltages.  
What’s in the box  
Please confirm that the following  
accessories are in the box when you open it.  
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends  
of each battery match the indications in  
the battery compartment.  
• Remote control  
• AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2  
• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow)  
• G-LINK™ cable  
• Remove batteries from equipment that  
isn’t going to be used for a month or  
more.  
• RF antenna cable  
• When disposing of used batteries,  
please comply with governmental  
regulations or environmental public  
instruction’s rules that apply in your  
country or area.  
• Power cable  
• These operating instructions  
• Warranty card  
Putting the batteries in the  
remote control  
WARNING  
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or  
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or  
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,  
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the  
life or performance of batteries.  
D3-4-2-3-3_En  
Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the  
battery compartment following the  
indications (,) inside the  
compartment.  
Using the remote control  
Please keep in mind the following when  
using the remote control:  
• Make sure that there are no obstacles  
between the remote and the remote  
sensor on the unit.  
• Remote operation may become  
unreliable if strong sunlight or  
fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s  
remote sensor.  
Important  
Incorrect use of batteries can result in  
hazards such as leakage and bursting.  
Please observe the following:  
• Remote controllers for different devices  
can interfere with each other. Avoid  
using remotes for other equipment  
located close to this unit.  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries  
together.  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 7 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
01  
Before you start  
• Replace the batteries when you notice a  
fall off in the operating range of the  
remote.  
Note that older models of DVD recorders  
and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2  
discs and/or corrupt the data on the disc. If  
you want to share DVD-RW discs between  
this recorder and an older recorder/writer,  
we recommend using ver. 1.1 discs.  
• When the batteries run down or you  
change the batteries, the remote control  
mode is reset to Recorder 1. See Remote  
Control Mode on page 143.  
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD  
recorders’ limited compatibility with DVD-  
RW ver. 1.2 discs.  
• Use within the operating range in front of  
the remote control sensor on the front  
panel, as shown.  
Model  
Playable  
Yes1,2,3  
Yes1  
Recordable  
DVR-7000  
No  
DVR-3100 /  
DVR-5100H  
No  
7 m  
1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before  
playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs  
may not play.  
2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in  
the display when you load a disc. However, this will not  
affect playback.  
3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.  
• You can control this recorder using the  
remote sensor of another Pioneer  
component using the CONTROL IN jack  
on the rear panel. See Rear panel  
connections on page 14 for more  
information.  
Disc / content format  
playback compatibility  
DVD/HDD Recording and playback  
compatibility  
This recorder can play and record all the  
currently popular DVD disc types, as well as  
providing HDD functionality. The table below  
shows some specific compatibility  
differences between the different disc types.  
Compatible media  
• DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 /  
2x to 4x / 2x to 6x  
• DVD-R ver. 2.0 /1x / 1x to 4x /  
1x to 8x / 1x to 16x, ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x  
to 16x  
• DVD+RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x  
• DVD+R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x  
to 16x  
• DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x / 2x to  
3x / 2x to 5x, ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x  
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x  
• DVD+R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 8 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
01  
Before you start  
DVD  
+RW  
DVD-  
RAM  
HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
DVD+R  
Marks used in this  
manual  
HDD  
DVD (VR)  
*1  
DVD (Video)  
DVD (VR)  
*1  
DVD (Video)  
DVD+R  
DVD+RW  
DVD-RAM  
*2  
*13, 16  
Logos  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*14  
Re-recordable /  
Erasable  
*4  
*4  
*4  
*4  
Editing of recorded  
programs  
*12  
*12  
*12  
Recording of Copy-  
once protected  
material  
n/a  
*5  
*6  
*7  
*6  
*6, 15  
*8  
*9  
Playback in other  
players/recorders  
Chase play  
16:9 and 4:3 pro-  
gram recording  
*10, 11  
*11  
*11  
*11  
Bilingual broad-  
cast recording of  
both audio chan-  
nels  
*11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM  
*12 CPRM-compatible discs only  
Notes to table  
*1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 126)  
*2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording  
(page 126)  
*3 Erasable, but free space does not increase  
*4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist  
editing  
*5 Must be compatible with DVD-R(VR) playback  
*6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in  
some units) (page 68)  
*7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW(VR) playback  
*8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback  
*9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback  
*10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video  
Mode Off (page 140)  
*13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only  
Panasonic and Maxell discs have been tested to work  
reliably with this recorder. Discs from other makers may  
become unusable when recorded or edited.  
*14 Erasing a title does not increase the available  
recording time, nor increase the number of recordable  
titles left.  
*15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback  
*16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized  
before it can be recorded (page 126). In this case,  
initialization will take about 1 hour.  
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo  
Licensing Corporation.  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 9 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
01  
Before you start  
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not  
compliant with the CD Audio specification  
and therefore may not play.  
Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs  
DVD-R DL (Dual-layer) and DVD+R DL  
(Double-layer) discs contain two recordable  
layers on a single side, giving about 1.8  
times the recording capacity of a  
conventional single-layer disc. This unit can  
record to both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL  
discs.  
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a  
DualDisc, the opposite side to that being  
played will be scratched. Scratched discs  
may not be playable.  
The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this  
product. DVD-Audio content will not play.  
• If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video  
mode) or DVD+R DL discs recorded on  
this unit on other DVD recorders/players,  
you must finalize them. (Note that some  
DVD recorders/players may not play  
even finalized DL discs.)  
For more detailed information on the  
DualDisc specification, please refer to the  
disc manufacturer or disc retailer.  
Other disc compatibility  
• Please read the information provided on  
the disc packaging carefully before  
purchasing DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs:  
In addition to DVD, this recorder is  
compatible with a wide range of disc types  
(media) and formats. Playable discs will  
generally feature one of the following logos  
on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note  
however that some disc types, such as  
recordable CD (and DVD), may be in an  
unplayable format—see below for further  
compatibility information.  
Confirm the disc version: Use ver. 3.0 /  
2x to 4x DVD-R discs.  
Confirm the recording speed: DVD-R  
should be compatible with 2x or 4x  
recording; DVD+R with 2.4x to 8x  
recording.  
• This logo indicates that the disc is a  
DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc:  
Audio CD  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
Video CD  
Super Video CD (Super VCD)  
• Correct operation has been confirmed  
for DVD-R DL discs (ver. 3.0 / 2x, 4x)  
produced by the following  
manufacturers: Mitsubishi Kagaku  
Media, Verbatim (as of March 2005).  
CD-R/-RW compatibility  
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW  
discs.  
• Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/  
Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM*  
containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX  
files.  
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD  
physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1.  
Romeo and Joliet file systems are both  
compatible with this recorder.  
About DualDisc playback  
A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side  
of which contains DVD content –video,  
audio, etc. –while the other side contains  
non-DVD content such as digital audio  
material.  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 10 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
01  
Before you start  
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-  
Audio and Video CD/Super VCD)  
WMA (Windows Media Audio)  
compatibility  
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio  
only  
Compressed audio compatibility  
• Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R,  
CD-RW.  
®
DVR-645H-S only: USB.  
The Windows Media logo printed on the  
box indicates that this recorder can playback  
Windows Media Audio content.  
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio  
Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio  
(WMA)  
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media  
Audio and refers to an audio compression  
technology developed by Microsoft  
• Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or  
48 kHz  
Corporation. WMA content can be encoded  
• Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher  
recommended)  
®
by using Windows Media Player for  
®
®
Windows XP, Windows Media Player 9 or  
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback:  
Yes  
®
Windows Media Player 10 series.  
• VBR WMA playback: No  
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows  
logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks  
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows  
Media Codec 8 (files encoded using  
Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable  
but some parts of the specification are not  
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless,  
Voice and VBR)  
DivX video compatibility  
1
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) file  
playback: No  
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must  
be used for the recorder to recognize  
MP3 and WMA files – do not use for  
other file types)  
DivX is a compressed digital video format  
created by the DivX video codec from DivX,  
®
Inc. This recorder can play DivX video files  
burned on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs. Keeping  
the same terminology as DVD-Video,  
individual DivX video files are called "Titles."  
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/-RW disc  
prior to burning, keep in mind that by default  
they will be played in alphabetical order.  
• File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files  
(if these limits are exceeded, only files  
and folders up to these limits are  
playable)  
Note  
1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by  
restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment)  
used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your  
PC and/or software.  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 11 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
01  
Before you start  
®
If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited  
• Official DivX Certified product.  
number of plays, then you may load the disc  
into your recorder and play the content as  
often as you like, and no message will be  
displayed.  
®
• Plays all versions of DivX video  
(including DivX 6) with standard  
playback of DivX media files.  
®
®
• File extensions: .avi and .divx (these  
must be used for the recorder to  
recognize DivX video files). Note that all  
files with the .avi extension are recognized  
as MPEG4, but not all of these are  
necessarily DivX video files and therefore  
may not be playable on this recorder.  
Important  
• DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM  
(Digital Rights Management) system.  
This restricts playback of content to  
specific, registered devices.  
• If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD  
content not authorized for this recorder,  
the message Authorization Error is  
displayed and the content will not play.  
• File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999  
files.  
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are  
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under  
license.  
• Resetting the recorder (as described in  
Resetting the recorder on page 160) will  
not cause you to lose your registration  
code.  
®
DivX VOD content  
DivX  
JPEG file compatibility  
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)  
content on this recorder, you first need to  
register the recorder with your DivX VOD  
content provider. You do this by generating a  
DivX VOD registration code, which you  
submit to your provider.  
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and  
EXIF 2.2* still image files  
*File format used by digital still cameras  
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0  
• Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels  
• Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels  
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No  
Some DivX VOD content may only be  
playable a fixed number of times. When you  
load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD  
content, the remaining number of plays is  
shown on-screen and you then have the  
option of playing the disc (thereby using up  
one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If  
you load a disc that contains expired DivX  
VOD content (for example, content that has  
zero remaining plays), the message Rental  
Expired is displayed.  
• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif  
(must be used for the recorder to  
recognize JPEG files – do not use for  
other file types)  
• File structure: The recorder can load up  
to 99 folders / 999 files at one time (if  
there are more files/folders that this on  
the disc then more can be reloaded)  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 12 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
01  
Before you start  
PC-created disc compatibility  
About the internal hard disk  
drive  
Discs recorded using a personal computer  
may not be playable in this unit due to the  
setting of the application software used to  
create the disc. In these particular  
instances, check with the software publisher  
for more detailed information.  
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile  
piece of equipment. Depending on the  
conditions under which it is used, or through  
careless use, it is possible that the recorded  
contents will be damaged or lost completely,  
or that normal playback and recording will  
not be possible. Please understand that in  
the event of repair or replacement of the  
HDD or related components, all your HDD  
recordings will be lost.  
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF  
format) are not compatible with this  
recorder.  
Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW  
software disc boxes for additional  
compatibility information.  
Please use the recorder following the  
guidelines below to protect against possible  
HDD failure.  
Dolby Digital  
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to  
store recordings permanently. We  
recommend that you back up your important  
recordings onto DVD discs in order to protect  
against accidental loss.  
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances  
accept responsibility for any direct or indirect  
loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of  
recorded material resulting from HDD failure.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. "Dolby" and the double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
• Do not move the recorder while it is on  
(this includes during EPG download  
when the display shows EPG).  
DTS  
• Install and use the recorder on a stable,  
level surface.  
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered  
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
• Do not use the recorder in excessively  
hot or humid places, or in places that  
may be subject to sudden changes in  
temperature. Sudden changes in  
temperature can cause condensation to  
form inside the recorder. This can be a  
cause of HDD failure.  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 13 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
01  
Before you start  
• While the recorder is switched on  
Symbols used in this manual  
(including during EPG download when  
the display shows EPG), do not unplug  
from the wall socket or switch the  
The following icons are provided to help you  
quickly identify which instructions you need  
for which kind of disc.  
electricity off from the breaker switch.  
• Do not move the recorder immediately  
after switching it off. If you need to move  
the recorder, please follow the steps  
below:  
HDD  
HDD  
DVD  
Any type of DVD disc  
1 After the message POWER OFF is  
shown in the display, wait at least two  
minutes.  
(recordable or playback  
only), finalized or not.  
2 Unplug from the wall socket.  
DVD-Video  
Commercially produced  
DVD, finalized Video mode  
DVD-R/-RW.  
3 Move the recorder.  
• If there’s a power failure while the  
recorder is on there is a chance that  
some data on the HDD will be lost.  
DVD (Video)  
Video mode DVD-R/-RW  
(unfinalized)  
• The HDD is very delicate. If used  
improperly or in an unsuitable  
environment, it is possible that the HDD  
will fail after a few years of use. Signs of  
problemsincludeplaybackunexpectedly  
freezing and noticeable block noise  
(mosaic) in the picture. However,  
sometimes there will be no warning  
signs of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no  
playback of recorded material will be  
possible. In this case it will be necessary  
to replace the HDD unit.  
DVD (VR)  
VR mode DVD-R/-RW  
DVD+R  
DVD+R  
DVD+RW  
DVD-RAM  
CD  
DVD+RW  
DVD-RAM  
Audio CD  
Optimizing HDD performance  
As you record and edit material on the HDD,  
the data on the disk becomes fragmented,  
eventually affecting the recorder’s  
performance. Before this happens, the  
recorder will warn you that it is time to  
optimize the HDD (which you can do from  
the Disc Setup menu; see Optimize HDD on  
page 127).  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
WMA/MP3  
DivX  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
WMA or MP3 files  
DivX files  
A L L  
All of the above  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 14 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
02  
Connecting up  
Chapter 2  
Connecting up  
Rear panel connections  
1
2
3
4
5
Y
IN  
HDMI OUT  
AC IN  
AV  
1
(RGB) – TV  
CONTROL  
P
B
AV  
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)  
OUTPUT  
R
DIGITAL  
OUT  
L
R
L
OUT  
P
R
ANTENNA  
COAXIAL  
IN  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
G-LINK  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT3  
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
1
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector  
5
HDMI OUT  
Audio/video output SCART-type AV  
HDMI output for high quality digital audio  
connector for connecting to a TV or other  
equipment with a SCART connector. The  
video output is switchable between video, S-  
video and RGB. See page AV1 Out on  
page 135 for how to set this up.  
and video.  
6
7
AC IN – Power inlet  
DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL  
Coaxial digital audio jack for connecting to  
an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS/  
MPEG decoder or other equipment with a  
digital input.  
2
OUTPUT  
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video  
outputs for connection to a TV or AV  
amplifier/receiver.  
8
CONTROL IN  
Use to control this recorder from the remote  
sensor of another Pioneer component with a  
CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the  
Pioneer mark. Connect the CONTROL  
OUT of the other component to the  
CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini-  
plug cord.  
3
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV  
connector  
Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV  
connector for connecting to a VCR, or other  
equipment with a SCART connector. The  
input accepts video, S-video and RGB. See  
AV2/L1 In on page 135 for how to set this up.  
9
G-LINK™  
4
ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT  
Use to connect the supplied G-LINK™ cable  
to enable GUIDE Plus+™ to control an  
external satellite receiver, etc.  
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN) jack. The signal is passed through  
to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to  
your TV.  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 15 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
02  
Connecting up  
10 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
A high-quality video output for connecting to  
a TV or monitor with a component video  
input.  
11 INPUT 3  
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video  
inputs for connection to a VCR or other  
source component.  
Front panel connections  
On the front panel a flip-down cover hides  
more connections.  
USB  
DV IN  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
(MONO)  
INPUT 2  
12  
13  
14  
15  
12 USB port (Type B) (DVR-645H-S only)  
USB port for connecting a PictBridge-  
compatible printer.  
13 USB port (Type A) (DVR-645H-S only)  
USB port for connecting a digital camera,  
USB memory or other USB device.  
14 DV IN (DVR-645H-S only)  
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for  
connecting a DV camcorder.  
15 INPUT 2  
Audio/video input (stereo analog audio;  
composite and S-video), especially suitable  
for camcorders, game consoles, portable  
audio, etc.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 16 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
02  
Connecting up  
Easy connections  
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programs,  
and play discs. Other types of connections are explained starting on the following page.  
Important  
• These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a  
SCART connection, if you want to use the supplied audio/video cable, see Using the  
supplied audio/video cable on page 17.  
• The AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or RGB video,  
plus stereo analog audio. The AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector accepts ordinary, S-  
video and RGB video input, as well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out and AV2/L1 In on  
page 135 for how to set them up.  
• Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components  
are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet.  
2
Use an RF antenna cable (one is  
supplied) to connect the antenna output  
of your VCR to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) of  
this recorder.  
ANTENNA  
IN  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
3
Use another RF antenna cable to  
4
TV  
connect the ANTENNA OUT of this  
recorder to the antenna input on your  
TV.  
3
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
Y
IN  
H
AC IN  
AV  
1
(RGB)  
TV  
PB  
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
2
OUTPUT  
R
DIGITAL  
OUT  
CONTROL  
L
L
OUT  
ANTENNA  
4
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to  
PR  
COAXIAL  
IN  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
G-LINK  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT3  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector  
on this recorder to the SCART AV  
connector on your TV.  
5
2
5
Use another SCART cable to connect  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV  
connector to a SCART AV connector on  
your VCR.  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
VCR  
ANTENNA  
IN  
1
Tip  
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function  
which allows you to record a TV program  
from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder  
while watching a video playing on your  
VCR (To use this feature when the  
recorder is in standby, Power Save  
must be set to Off—see Power Save on  
page 132).  
1
Connect the cable from the antenna/  
cable TV outlet to the antenna input on  
your VCR.  
• If you are not connecting a VCR in the  
chain, connect it to the ANTENNA IN  
(RF IN) jack on this recorder and skip the  
next step.  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 17 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
02  
Connecting up  
Using the S-video or component  
video output  
Using other types of audio/  
video output  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO INPUT  
If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to  
connect your TV to this recorder, there are  
standard audio/video output jacks, as well as  
an S-video and component video output.  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
1
2
TV  
Using the supplied audio/video  
cable  
Y
IN  
HDMI OUT  
AC IN  
P
B
AV (INPUCODER)  
2
OTPUT  
R
DIG
OUT  
L
R
L
OUT  
ANTENNA  
P
R
COAXIAL  
I
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
G-LINK  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT3  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
1
Connect the S-video or component  
video output to a similar input on your  
TV.  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
For an S-video connection, use an S-video  
cable (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO  
OUTPUT jack to an S-video input on your TV.  
TV  
1
2
For a component video connection, use a  
component video cable (not supplied) to  
connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
jacks to a component video input on your TV.  
Y
IN  
HDMI OUT  
AC IN  
AV  
1
(RGB)  
TV  
PB  
V  
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)  
OUUT  
R
DIGITAL  
OUT  
CONTROL  
L
R
L
OUT  
PR  
ANTENNA  
COAXIAL  
IN  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
G-LINK  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT3  
1
Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a  
See also Component Video Out on page 135  
for how to set up the component video  
output for use with a progressive scan-  
compatible TV.  
video input on your TV.  
Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/  
video cable for the video connection.  
2
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to  
2
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to  
the corresponding audio inputs on your  
TV.  
the corresponding audio inputs on your  
TV.  
Use the red and white jacks of the supplied  
audio/video cable for the audio connection.  
Make sure you match up the left and right  
outputs with their corresponding inputs for  
correct stereo sound.  
You can use the supplied audio/video cable,  
leaving the yellow video plug disconnected.  
Make sure you match up the left and right  
outputs with their corresponding inputs for  
correct stereo sound.  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 18 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
02  
Connecting up  
Connecting to a cable box,  
satellite receiver or digital  
terrestrial receiver  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
ANTENNA  
IN  
2
TV  
If you have a cable, satellite or digital  
terrestrial receiver with a built-in decoder,  
connect it to this recorder and your TV as  
1
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
1
Y
IN  
shown on the following page. If you are  
HDI
AC IN  
AV  
1
(RGB)  
TV  
P
B
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
2
OUTPUT  
R
DIGITAL  
OUT  
CONTROL  
L
R
L
OUT  
ANTENNA  
PR  
using a separate decoder box for your cable/  
satellite TV, set up following the instructions  
on the next page.  
COAXIAL  
IN  
AUDIO  
O  
VIDEO  
G-LNK  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT3  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
4
Using the setup on this page you can:  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
1
3
• Record any channel by selecting it on  
the cable box, satellite receiver or digital  
terrestrial receiver.  
Cable/Satellite/  
Digital Terrestrial  
receiver  
ANTENNA  
IN  
• Change channels and set timer  
recordings on the external receiver using  
the GUIDE Plus+™ system (via the  
G-LINK™ cable, and after setting up).  
1
Satellite dish/  
antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
Important  
This enables you to watch and record TV  
channels.  
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV  
‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or  
other component. Always connect each  
component directly to your TV or AV  
amplifier/receiver.  
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to  
connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector  
to a SCART AV connector on your TV.  
This enables you to watch discs.  
• When using the GUIDE Plus+ system to  
make a timer recording from an external  
receiver, make sure that the external  
receiver is switched on.  
3
Use another SCART cable to connect  
the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV  
connector to a SCART AV connector on  
yourcablebox/satellite/digitalterrestrial  
receiver.  
This enables you to record scrambled TV  
channels.  
Note  
1 The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video  
connections.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 19 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
02  
Connecting up  
4
Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to  
the G-LINK™ jack.  
This enables you to control the tuner in the  
external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+™  
system.  
Position the IR transmitter end of the G-  
LINK™ cable so that the IR receiver on your  
cable/satellite/digital terrestrial receiver will  
pick up the control signals (see diagram).  
Y
AV  
1
(RGB)  
TV  
P
B
OUTPUT  
R
DIGITAL  
OUT  
CONTROL  
L
P
R
COAXIAL  
IN  
G-LINK  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
G-LINK cable  
See the manual that came with your cable/  
satellite/digital terrestrial receiver if you’re  
not sure where the IR receiver is on the front  
panel. Alternatively, experiment with the  
remote control, operating it from very close  
range until you find the place where the  
receiver responds.  
Tip  
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function  
which allows you to record a TV program  
from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder  
while watching a video playing on your  
VCR (To use this feature when the  
recorder is in standby, Power Save  
must be set to Off—see Power Save on  
page 132).  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 20 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
02  
Connecting up  
Connecting an external  
decoder box (1)  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
If you have an external, dedicated decoder  
box for your satellite or cable TV system, use  
the setup described on this page. See the  
previous page for how to connect the G-  
LINK™ cable.  
4
TV  
Y
IN  
HDMI OUT  
AC IN  
AV  
1
(RGB)  
TV  
P
B
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
2
OUTPUT  
R
DIGITAL  
OUT  
CONTROL  
L
L
OUT  
PR  
ANTENNA  
COAXIAL  
IN  
G-LINK  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT3  
Important  
• Do not connect your decoder box directly  
to this recorder.  
3
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
2
• Information from the decoder (for  
example, relating to pay TV services), is  
only viewable when this recorder is off  
(in standby).  
Decoder  
VCR/Satellite receiver  
/Cable box  
ANTENNA  
IN  
1
• For timer recording to work properly on  
this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/  
cable box must also be switched on  
during recording.  
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
1
Connect the cable from the antenna/  
cable TV outlet to the antenna input on  
your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.  
• It is not possible to watch one TV  
program and record another using this  
setup.  
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to  
connect your decoder to your VCR/  
satellite receiver/cable box.  
See the manual for your decoder box for  
more detailed instructions.  
3
Use a SCART cable to connect your  
VCR/satellite receiver/cable box to the  
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector on  
this recorder.  
4
Use a SCART cable to connect the  
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to your TV.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 21 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
02  
Connecting up  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
Connecting an external  
decoder box (2)  
This enables you to watch and record TV  
channels.  
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to  
If you only have a decoder, connect it to this  
recorder and your TV as shown on this  
page.  
connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector  
to a SCART AV connector on your TV.  
This enables you to watch discs.  
1
Using the setup on this page you can:  
3
Use another SCART cable to connect  
• Record scrambled channels received  
using the recorder’s built-in TV tuner.  
the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV  
connector to a SCART AV connector on  
your decoder box.  
This enables you to record scrambled TV  
channels.  
Important  
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’  
your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box.  
Always connect each component  
directly to your TV or AV amplifier/  
receiver.  
SCART AV  
ANTENNA  
CONNECTOR  
IN  
2
TV  
1
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
Y
IN  
H
AC IN  
AV  
1
(RGB)  
TV  
PB  
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
2
OUTPUT  
R
DIGITAL  
OUT  
CONTROL  
L
R
L
OUT  
PR  
ANTENNA  
COAXIAL  
IN  
G-LINK  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT3  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
3
1
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
Antenna/cable TV  
Decoder wall outlet  
Note  
1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu:  
• Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 135).  
• From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual  
CH Setting on page 134).  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 22 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
02  
Connecting up  
Connecting to an AV  
amplifier/receiver  
ANTENNA  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you  
need to connect this recorder to an AV  
amplifier/receiver using the digital coaxial  
output.  
TV  
4
1
VIDEO  
OUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
IN  
DIGITAL  
IN  
In addition to a digital connection, we  
recommend also connecting using the  
stereo analog connection for compatibility  
with all discs and sources.  
2
3
AV amp/  
receiver  
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
Y
IN  
AC IN  
You’ll probably also want to connect a video  
output to your AV amplifier/receiver. Use the  
ordinary video output (as shown here), or the  
S-video output.  
A
1
(RGB)  
TV  
P
B
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
2
OUTPUT  
R
DIGITAL  
OUT  
CONTROL  
L
R
L
OUT  
ANTENNA  
P
R
COAXIAL  
IN  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
G-LINK  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT3  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
1
Important  
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
• Noise may be output from your speakers  
if the recorder is not set up to work with  
your AV amplifier/receiver properly (see  
Audio Out on page 137).  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
This enables you to watch and record TV  
channels.  
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV  
‘through’ your VCR using A/V cables.  
Always connect it directly to your TV.  
2
Connect the DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL  
jack on this recorder to a coaxial digital  
input on your AV amplifier/receiver.  
This enables you to listen to multichannel  
surround sound.  
3
Connect the analog AUDIO OUTPUT  
and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks on this recorder  
to an analog audio and video input on  
your AV amplifier/receiver.  
4
Connect the AV amplifier/receiver’s  
video output to a video input on your TV.  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 23 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
02  
Connecting up  
HDMI setup is generally automatic. There  
Connecting using HDMI  
are however settings you can change if you  
need to. See HDMI Output (only available  
when an HDMI device is connected) on  
page 142 for more information. Note that the  
HDMI settings remain in effect until you  
change them, or connect a new HDMI  
component.  
1
If you have an HDMI or DVI-equipped  
2
monitor or display , you can connect it to  
this recorder using an HDMI cable (not  
supplied).  
The HDMI connector outputs  
uncompressed digital video, as well as  
almost every kind of digital audio.  
Important  
1
Use an HDMI cable to connect the  
• An HDMI connection can only be made  
with DVI-equipped components  
HDMI OUT connector on this recorder to  
an HDMI connector on an HDMI-compat-  
ible monitor.  
compatible with both DVI and High-  
bandwidth Digital Content Protection  
(HDCP). If you choose to connect to a  
DVI connector, you will need a DVI to  
HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI to HDCP  
connection, however, does not support  
audio. Consult your local audio dealer for  
more information.  
HDMI  
IN  
HDMI-compatible display  
• The HDMI connection is compatible with  
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/  
20 bit/24 bit 2-channel linear PCM  
signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and  
MPEG audio bitstream.  
Y
IN  
HDMI OUT  
AC IN  
AV  
1
(RGB)  
TV  
PB  
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
2
OUTPUT  
R
DIGITAL  
OUT  
CONTROL  
L
R
L
OUT  
PR  
ANTENNA  
COAXIAL  
IN  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
G-LINK  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT3  
• If your connected component is only  
compatible with Linear PCM, the signal  
is output as Linear PCM (DTS audio is  
not output).  
• The arrow on the cable connector body  
should be face down for correct  
alignment with the connector on the  
recorder.  
• If you have connected to a Pioneer  
plasma display, please select the HDMI  
setup on the display (refer to the  
When connected to an HDMI component or  
HDCP-compatible DVI component, the  
HDMI indicator lights.  
supplied manual for more on this).  
Note  
1 This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) version 1.2a and  
HDCP version 1.1. Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in  
unreliable signal transfers.  
2 The pixel resolution of this recorder’s HDMI video output is (according to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280  
x 720p, 1920 x 1080i) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i). If your display is not compatible with  
these resolutions the picture may not be correctly reproduced.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 24 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
02  
Connecting up  
About HDMI  
Connecting other AV sources  
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)  
supports both video and audio on a single  
digital connection for use with DVD players  
and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes, and other  
AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide  
the technologies of High Bandwidth Digital  
Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital  
Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification.  
HDCP is used to protect digital content  
transmitted and received by DVI-compliant  
displays.  
Connecting a VCR or analog  
camcorder  
OPEN/CLOSE  
HDD/DVD  
HDMI  
ONE  
STANDBY/ON  
S
T
O
P
REC  
T
O
U
C
H
CH  
+
COPY  
REC  
DVR-645H-S  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
INPUT  
(Rear panel)  
(Front panel)  
1
2
HDMI has the capability to support  
standard, enhanced, or high-definition video  
plus standard to multi-channel surround-  
sound audio. HDMI features include  
uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of  
up to 5 gigabits per second (Dual Link), one  
connector (instead of several cables and  
connectors), and communication between  
the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.  
Analog camcorder  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
INPUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
VCR  
1
Connect a set of audio and video  
inputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set  
of outputs on this recorder.  
This enables you to record from this recorder  
to your VCR or camcorder.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC.  
• You can use standard video or S-video  
cables for the video connection.  
• Alternatively, you can use the  
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART  
connector for audio/video input and  
output with just one SCART cable.  
2
Connect a set of audio and video  
outputs of your VCR or camcorder to a  
set of inputs on this recorder.  
This enables you to record tapes from your  
VCR or camcorder.  
• You can use standard video or S-video  
cables for the video connection.  
• The front panel connections make  
convenient connections for a camcorder  
input.  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 25 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
02  
Connecting up  
Connecting a DV camcorder  
Connecting a USB device  
DVR-645H-S only  
DVR-645H-S only  
Using the front panel DV IN jack, it is  
possible to connect a DV camcorder or video  
deck, or DVD-R/-RW recorder and digitally  
transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/-RW discs to  
DVD-R/-RW.  
Using the USB ports on the front of the  
recorder you can connect USB devices such  
as digital cameras and printers. Please also  
see the instructions that came with the  
device you want to connect before using.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
HDD/DVD  
HDMI  
Important  
ONE  
STANDBY/ON  
S
T
O
P
REC  
T
O
U
C
H
CH  
+
COPY  
REC  
USB  
V
I
N
S
-
V
I
D
E
O
V
I
D
E
O
L
AUDIO  
(MONO)  
INPUT  
R
2
• This jack is for connection to DV  
equipment only. It is not compatible with  
digital satellite receivers or D-VHS video  
decks.  
DVR-645H-S  
USB  
Type B  
USB  
Type A  
USB  
USB  
OPEN/CLOSE  
HDD/DVD  
HDMI  
ONE  
TOUCH  
COPY  
STANDBY/ON  
STOP  
REC  
REC  
CH  
+
Digital Camera  
PictBridge-compatible  
Printer  
USB  
S
-
V
I
D
E
O
V
I
D
E
O
L
AUDIO  
(MONO)  
INPUT  
R
2
DVR-645H-S  
DV  
IN  
Important  
DV  
OUT  
• Some USB devices may not work with  
this recorder.  
• Devices may not work reliably if  
connected to this recorder via a USB  
hub.  
DV camcorder  
Use a DV cable (not supplied) to  
connect the DV jack of your DV  
camcorder/video deck to the front  
panel DV IN jack of this recorder.  
JPEG file storage devices  
• Digital still camera  
• Memory card reader (any type of  
memory card)  
• USB memory  
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device  
should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the  
device is partitioned, this recorder may not  
recognize it.  
The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be  
used to transfer up to about 4000 files.  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 26 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
02  
Connecting up  
WMA/MP3 file storage devices  
• Memory card reader (any type of  
memory card)  
• USB memory  
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device  
should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the  
device is partitioned, this recorder may not  
recognize it.  
Note that although multi-slot card readers  
can be used, the recorder will only recognize  
the first card inserted. To read another card,  
remove all the cards and insert the card to be  
read again.  
Using a USB printer  
• Use a PictBridge-compatible printer.  
Plugging in  
After checking all the connections, plug in  
the recorder.  
Use the supplied power cable to  
connect this recorder to a power outlet.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 27 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
03  
Controls and displays  
CChaoptnert3rols and displays  
Front panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OPEN/CLOSE  
HDD/DVD  
HDMI  
ONE  
TOUCH  
COPY  
STANDBY/ON  
STOP  
REC  
REC  
CH  
+
USB  
DV IN  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
(MONO)  
INPUT 2  
10  
8
12 13 14 15  
11  
DVR-645H-S  
1
STANDBY/ON  
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.  
Front panel display and IR remote  
sensor  
See Display on page 28 for details.  
2
3
Disc tray  
9
REC  
OPEN/CLOSE  
Press to open/close the disc tray.  
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to  
set the recording time in 30 minute blocks.  
4
HDD / DVD indicators  
10 Front panel inputs  
See Front panel connections on page 15 for  
more information on these.  
Indicator lights blue when the hard disk  
(HDD) is selected; orange when the DVD  
drive is selected.  
11 ꢆ  
5
HDMI indicator  
Press to start or restart playback.  
Lights when this recorder is connected to  
HDMI (HDCP) compatible component.  
12 ꢇ  
Press to stop playback.  
6
PAUSE LIVE TV (page 61)  
Press to start recording the current TV  
channel, but with playback paused,  
effectively pausing the broadcast.  
13 CH +/–  
Use to change channels, skip chapters/  
tracks, etc.  
7
HDD/DVD  
14 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 102)  
Press to start One Touch Copy of the  
currently playing title to DVD or the HDD.  
Press to switch between HDD and DVD for  
recording and playback.  
15 STOP REC  
Press to stop recording.  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 28 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
03  
Controls and displays  
Display  
1
2
3
4
5
L
R
P
8
7
6
1
5
Recording quality indicators (page 59)  
Lights during playback; blinks when  
playback is paused.  
XP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
2
XP (best quality).  
Lights when copying.  
SP  
3
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
SP (standard play).  
Lights during recording; blinks when  
recording is paused.  
LP / SLP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
LP (long play) or SLP (super-long play).  
4
(page 63)  
Lights when a timer recording has been  
set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has  
been set to DVD but there isn’t a  
recordable disc loaded, or the timer has  
been set to HDD but the HDD is not  
recordable.)  
EP / SEP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
EP (extended play) or SEP (super-  
extended play).  
MN  
NTSC  
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
MN (manual recording level) mode.  
Lights when the video output signal  
format is NTSC.  
6
7
Character display  
R / RW  
Lights when a recordable DVD-R or DVD-RW  
disc is loaded.  
(page 136)  
Indicates which channels of a bilingual  
broadcast are recorded.  
(page 135)  
8
PL (page 89)  
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded  
and the recorder is in Play List mode.  
Lights when the component video output  
is set to progressive scan (except in  
some cases when a component is  
connected using HDMI).  
2 3 (page 143)  
Shows the remote control mode (if  
nothing is displayed, the remote control  
mode is 1).  
VPS / PDC (page 63)  
Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC  
broadcast during a VPS/PDC-enabled  
timer recording.  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 29 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
03  
Controls and displays  
V
1
STANDBY/ON  
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode  
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.  
disc is loaded.  
2
PAUSE LIVE TV (page 61)  
Press to start recording the current TV  
channel, but with playback paused,  
effectively pausing the broadcast.  
Remote control  
3
DISC NAVIGATOR (page 76, 89) / TOP  
MENU (page 73)  
STANDBY/ON  
HDD/DVD  
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen,  
or the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized  
DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded.  
1
2
11  
PAUSE LIVE TV HOME MENU  
INFO  
12  
13  
14  
TOP MENU  
DISC  
4
ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ and ENTER  
GUIDE  
NAVIGATOR  
3
4
CHANNEL  
+
Used to navigate all on-screen displays.  
Press ENTER to select the currently  
highlighted option.  
CM  
BACK  
CM  
SKIP  
ENTER  
PAUSE  
RETURN  
STOP  
CHANNEL  
CM BACK (commercial back)  
Press repeatedly to skip progressively  
backward through the audio or video  
playing.  
5
6
15  
16  
REC  
PLAY  
STOP REC  
PREV  
NEXT  
17  
CM SKIP (commercial skip)  
Press repeatedly to skip progressively  
forward through the audio or video  
playing.  
TIMER REC  
7
8
/  
/
HELP  
TV/DVD  
18  
ONE TOUCH COPY  
INPUT SELECT  
REC MODE  
19  
20  
21  
22  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
CHANNEL +/– (page 58)  
Press to change the channel of the built-  
in TV tuner.  
9
PLAY MODE MENU  
SHIFT  
CLEAR  
DISPLAY  
10  
5
PAUSE  
Press to pause playback or recording.  
OPEN  
6
Recording controls (page 60)  
REC  
Press to start recording. Press  
repeatedly to set the recording time in  
blocks of 30 mins.  
When the red action button is visible in a  
GUIDE Plus+™ screen, use for One-  
Button-Record.  
STOP REC  
Press to stop recording.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 30 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
03  
Controls and displays  
7
GUIDE Plus+™ Action buttons  
(page 40)  
When in the GUIDE Plus+™ system,  
these buttons act as the Red, Green,  
Yellow and Blue Action buttons (the  
functions of these buttons change  
according to the GUIDE Plus+™ Area).  
SUBTITLE (page 81)  
Hold SHIFT and press to display/change  
the subtitles included in multilingual  
DVD-Video discs.  
ANGLE (page 83)  
Hold SHIFT and press to switch camera  
angles on discs with multi-angle scenes.  
TIMER REC (page 40)  
PLAY MODE (page 78)  
Hold SHIFT and press to set a timer  
recording from the GUIDE Plus+™  
system.  
Hold SHIFT and press to change the play  
mode (search, repeat, program play,  
etc.).  
8
ꢋ ꢌ (page 77)  
10 SHIFT  
Use to access functions on the remote  
printed in green.  
Press to start reverse or forward  
scanning. Press again to change the  
speed.  
11 HDD/DVD (page 60)  
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD  
for recording and playback.  
ꢊ/ꢍ ꢎ/ꢉ (page 78)  
While paused, press and hold to start  
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly  
to change the playback speed.  
12 INFO  
Press to see additional information for the  
highlighted item in GUIDE Plus+™.  
While paused, press to advance a single  
frame in either direction.  
When GUIDE Plus+™ is displayed, use  
to display the previous/next day.  
13 HOME MENU  
Press to display the Home Menu, from  
which you can navigate all the functions of  
the recorder.  
9
Number buttons, CLEAR  
Use the number buttons for track/  
chapter/title selection; channel  
selection, and so on. The same buttons  
can also be used to enter names for  
titles, discs and so on.  
14 GUIDE  
Press to display the GUIDE Plus+™ screen;  
press again to exit.  
15 RETURN  
Press to go back one level in the on-screen  
menu or display.  
Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start  
again.  
REC MODE (page 59)  
16 PLAY (page 71)  
Hold SHIFT and press repeatedly to  
change the recording mode (picture  
quality).  
Press to start playback.  
STOP (page 71)  
Press to stop playback.  
AUDIO (page 58, 82)  
Hold SHIFT and press to change the  
audio language or channel. (When the  
recorder is stopped, press to change the  
tuner audio.)  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 31 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
03  
Controls and displays  
17 PREV NEXT  
Press to skip to the previous or next title/  
chapter/track/folder; or to display the  
previous or next menu page.  
When GUIDE Plus+™ is displayed, use to  
display the previous/next page.  
18 HELP  
Press for help on how to use the current  
GUI screen.  
TV/DVD  
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in  
which you get the picture and sound  
from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’, in  
which you get picture and sound from  
the recorder’s tuner (or an external  
input).  
19 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 102)  
Press to start One Touch Copy of the  
currently playing title to DVD or the HDD.  
20 INPUT SELECT (page 67)  
Press to change the input to use for  
recording.  
21 MENU (page 73)  
Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-  
Video, finalized DVD-R/-RW or finalized  
DVD+R/+RW disc is loaded.  
When in the GUIDE Plus+™ system, use to  
jump directly to the Menu bar.  
22 DISPLAY (page 83)  
Displays/changes the on-screen information  
displays.  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 32 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
04  
Getting started  
Chapter 4  
Getting started  
Switching on and setting up  
ENTER  
3
Choose a language (then  
When you switch the recorder on for the first  
time, you can make several basic settings  
using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes  
you through setting the clock, the internal TV  
tuner and the video output.  
press ENTER).  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Clock Language  
Tuner  
Input
Powe
Video In/ Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
If you’re using the recorder for the first time,  
we strongly recommend you use the Setup  
Navigator before starting to use the  
recorder.  
HELP
Setup
1
Switch on your TV and set the video  
input to this recorder.  
ENTER  
4
Start the Setup Navigator.  
STANDBY/ON  
k
t
Complete this setup before you  
2
Switch on the recorder.  
start using your recorder.  
e
P
When you switch on for the first time, your  
TV should display the Setup Navigator  
screen (If the Setup Navigator doesn’t  
appear, you can also access it from the  
Initial Setup menu; see page 132).  
Start  
Cancel  
p
Please use the Initial Setup if you  
want to make more detailed settings.  
• If you don’t want to use the Setup  
Navigator, press to select Cancel,  
then press ENTER to exit the Setup  
Navigator.  
• If this recorder is connected to a  
compatible TV using a fully-wired 21-pin  
SCART cable, the recorder will take a few  
seconds to download country, TV screen  
size and language information. (Check  
the manual that came with your TV for  
compatibility information.)  
ENTER  
5
Select the Auto Channel  
Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or ‘Download from  
TV’), or ‘Do not set’.  
k
AutoChannel Setting  
er
P
AutoScan  
Download from TV  
p Do not Set  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 33 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
04  
Getting started  
• Select Do not set if you want to skip  
channel setup (because they have  
already been set up, for example).  
Auto clock setting  
Some TV channels broadcast time  
signals together with the program. This  
recorder can use these signals to set the  
clock automatically.  
• You can only use the Download from  
TV feature if this recorder is connected  
to your TV using a fully-wired 21-pin  
SCART cable via the AV1(RGB)-TV  
connector, and if your TV supports this  
function (check your TV’s instruction  
manual for more details).  
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel  
preset number that broadcasts a time  
signal, then move the cursor down to  
‘Start’ and press ENTER.  
k
AutoClock Setting  
Date  
––  
––  
/
:
––  
––  
/
––––  
er
Time  
ENTER  
P
Select your country.  
p
Clock Set CH  
Pr  
1
Start  
k
Country Selection  
t
eCountry  
P
Austria  
The recorder takes a short while to set  
the time. After you see that it’s set, select  
Next to proceed.  
Auto-tuning channels  
The Auto Scan option automatically scans  
and sets the channel presets.  
k
AutoClock Setting  
Date  
SUN 01  
11  
/
01  
20  
/
2006  
er
Time  
:
P
Tuning  
p
Clock Set CH  
Pr  
1
32/99  
Start  
Next  
Cancel  
Downloading channels from your TV  
If the time could not be set  
automatically, press RETURN to go back  
to the previous screen and select  
Manual.  
Use the Download from TV option to  
download all the channels that your TV is  
tuned to.  
Manual clock setting  
Downloading  
Pr 5  
If no stations in your area are  
broadcasting time signals, you can set  
the clock manually.  
32/99  
Cancel  
Use the ꢃ/ꢀ buttons to set your  
time zone.  
You can set this by selecting a city or a  
ENTER  
6
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic  
time setting, or ‘Manual’ to set the clock  
manually.  
time relative to GMT.  
1/2  
k
Manual Clock Setting  
k
ClockSetting  
Time Zone  
Austria  
Vienna  
er
e
P
Auto  
P
Manual  
p Summer Time  
Off  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 34 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
04  
Getting started  
Press then use the ꢃ/buttons to  
select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for summer time,  
then press ENTER.  
Select On if you are currently using  
summer time.  
ENTER  
8
Select whether or not your TV  
is compatible with progressive scan  
video.  
1/2  
k
Progressive  
k
Manual Clock Setting  
Time Zone  
Austria  
Vienna  
er
P
Compatible  
e
Not Compatible  
P
p Don't Know  
p Summer Time  
On  
• Note that progressive scan video is only  
output through the AV1(RGB)-TV  
connector and the component video  
outputs.  
Set the date (day/month/year) and  
time, then press ENTER to make all  
the settings.  
2/2  
k
Manual Clock Setting  
Date  
e
SUN 01  
/
:
01  
00  
/
2006  
ENTER  
9
Press to continue after reading  
P
Time  
p
Time Zone  
00  
the HDD caution.  
Austria  
Vienna  
k Inthe event of HDD failure, recordings may  
Summer Time  
On  
be lost or normal playback/recording may  
not be possible.  
e
As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD  
P
failure, we recommend to use the HDD only  
• Use the ꢁ/ꢂ buttons to change the  
value in the highlighted field.  
as temporary storage media.  
p
Please copy recordings you want to keep  
to recordable DVD.  
Press ENTER to continue.  
• Use the ꢃ/ꢀ buttons to move from one  
field to another.  
• You can go back to the previous screen  
at anytime in the Setup Navigator by  
pressing RETURN.  
ENTER  
10  
Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit  
the Setup Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you  
want to start again.  
ENTER  
k
Setting  
Setupis complete!  
7
Select the TV screen type,  
er Enjoy using your DVD recorder!  
Finish Setup  
‘Wide (16:9)’ or ‘Standard (4:3)’.  
p
Go Back  
k
TVScreen Size  
That completes basic setup using the Setup  
Navigator.  
e
P
Wide (16:9)  
Standard (4:3)  
p Navigator  
• If there are blank channels with no  
station, you can set these to skip using  
the manual channel setting. See Manual  
CH Setting on page 134.  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 35 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
04  
Getting started  
The language and country settings are  
already set to whatever you selected in the  
Setup Navigator.  
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™  
system  
The GUIDE Plus+™ system is a free,  
interactive on-screen television  
programming guide. The system offers  
program listings for all major channels, one-  
touch recording, search by genre,  
recommendations according to your profile  
and more.  
ENTER  
2
Highlight ‘Postal Code’.  
For the GUIDE Plus+ system to function  
correctly, it is important that you set the  
language and country correctly in the Setup  
Navigator, and that you have performed a  
scan for available channels, as these are all  
used by the GUIDE Plus+ system. If any of  
these things are not yet set, please run the  
Setup Navigator first (see Switching on and  
setting up on page 32).  
REC MODE  
TV listings information is received via ‘host  
channels’. In order to receive the correct TV  
listings information for your country or  
region you need to set up the GUIDE Plus+  
system and ‘download’ the TV listings  
information. The initial download can take  
up to 24 hours, but once this is done, all  
future updates are automatic.  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
PLAY MODE  
ENTER  
3
code.  
Enter your postal  
GUIDE  
1
Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup  
menu.  
The system uses your postal code to identify  
which TV listings data is correct for the area  
in which you live, so it is important that you  
enter it correctly.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 36 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
04  
Getting started  
4
If you are using an external receiver  
If the channel did not change, select No. The  
GUIDE Plus+ system will try other codes  
assigned to your external receiver. If none of  
the codes changes the channel  
(such as a satellite receiver) with the  
supplied G-LINK cable, complete this  
step, otherwise jump to step 5 below.  
successfully, tune your external receiver to  
the host channel for your country (refer to  
step 5 below) and leave it on overnight. The  
recorder needs to be in standby; it will wake  
up automatically and download new codes  
from the host channel. The next day, try this  
setup process again:  
• Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE  
Plus+ setup menu.  
• Press to highlight the Menu bar, then  
use to reach the Setup area and  
select Setup.  
• Continue setting up from the start of this  
step again.  
• See Connecting to a cable box, satellite  
receiver or digital terrestrial receiver on  
page 18 for more on using the supplied  
G-LINK cable.  
If your external receiver still doesn’t respond  
to the G-LINK controller, please call  
customer support and report the brand and  
model of your external receiver.  
• Select External Receiver 1, 2 or 3, then  
press ENTER. (If you have just one  
external receiver, use External Receiver  
1. You can add further receivers in 2 and  
3 if you need to.)  
See also GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and  
troubleshooting on page 52.  
5
Identify the host channel for your  
country.  
After pressing ENTER:  
The TV listings information available in the  
GUIDE Plus+ system is distributed  
throughout Europe by selected broadcasters  
called host channels. It is important that the  
host channel for your country is correctly  
identified in order to receive listings  
information (EPG download).  
• Select your reception method  
(Terrestrial, Cable or Satellite).  
• Select your provider (if applicable).  
• Select the brand of your external  
receiver.  
• Identify which input your external  
receiver is connected to.  
Follow A, B or C below depending on your  
setup:  
After completing these steps the recorder  
will try and communicate with your external  
receiver and change the channel via the G-  
LINK cable. If the channel was successfully  
changed, select Yes to confirm.  
A If you are not using an external  
receiver, this recorder will automatically  
scan all channels for the host channel:  
• Leave the recorder in standby overnight  
(do not leave it switched on).  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 37 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
04  
Getting started  
B If you are using an external receiver,  
you need to identify the host channel  
from the table below:  
About EPG download  
• EPG data can only be received when the  
recorder is in standby. (When not using  
the recorder, therefore, please switch it  
into standby.) If you’re using an external  
receiver, leave this on when EPG data is  
downloading.  
Country/ Host  
Comments  
Region  
Austria  
channels  
Eurosport  
• If you cannot receive any of the host  
channels (see the above table) then you  
won’t be able to use the GUIDE Plus+  
system. In this case do not set the postal  
code (or set Country to Other) in the  
GUIDE Plus+ setup screen. (When  
GUIDE Plus+ service starts in your area,  
set the postal code again.)  
Belgium  
RTL-TVI  
Music  
Factory (TMF)  
TMF will be switched  
off in the near future.  
France  
Germany  
Italy  
Canal+  
Eurosport  
MTV  
Analog only  
Analog only  
Netherlands Music  
Factory  
TMF will be switched  
off in the near future.  
• Even if you can’t use the EPG functions  
where you live, you can still set  
ShowView timer recordings and manual  
recordings — see Setting a timer  
recording on page 63.  
(TMF),  
Eurosport  
Tele 5  
Switzerland Eurosport  
Spain  
Analog only  
• The front panel display shows EPG when  
receiving data. If you power on the  
recorder during an EPG download, the  
download is canceled.  
UK  
ITV, Eurosport ITV is analog only. Use  
Eurosport if you are a  
SKY subscriber and  
you no longer have a  
terrestrial antenna.  
• EPG data may be received several times  
a day. All updates are automatic.  
• Tune your external receiver to the  
appropriate host channel and leave the  
receiver on and the recorder in standby  
overnight.  
• When downloading EPG data, the  
recorder may sound as though it is on.  
This is normal.  
C If you use both an external receiver  
and this recorder as sources, follow the  
instructions above for setting up without  
an external receiver. Only if this is  
unsuccessful try the external receiver  
method.  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 38 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
04  
Getting started  
channel can be found on its receiving  
device/source. The entry in the Editor  
screen must match this number for  
correct recording of that channel.  
Checking the downloaded data the  
following day  
GUIDE  
1
Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.  
• The above is especially important for the  
‘host channel’. Please make sure that  
the host channel is always switched ON.  
REC MODE  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
PLAY MODE  
2
Change the program  
numbers as you like.  
Changing the program numbers allows you  
to decide the order in which the channels  
change when stepping through them  
sequentially. You can do this to group  
certain channels together, for example.  
You should see a grid filled with channel  
logos and TV listings information. Use the  
ꢁ/ꢂ buttons to review the list. If you notice  
that there are channels missing, or that  
there are channels in the list that you don’t  
get, go to the Editor screen:  
• Press repeatedly until the Menu bar is  
highlighted.  
• Press until Editor is highlighted. The  
main area of the screen now shows a list  
of channels. Those that are turned ON  
are displayed in the grid; those that are  
OFF are hidden. Use the ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ  
buttons to move down the list and turn  
channels ON or OFF as necessary.  
3
When you’re done, press the BLUE  
Action button (Home) to get back to the  
GUIDE Plus+ home screen.  
• You can find detailed information on  
using the GUIDE Plus+ system in the  
following chapter.  
• For any channel that you turn ON, the  
GUIDE Plus+ system will need to know  
how it is received (the source) and on  
which program number. The source may  
be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or  
an external receiver. The program  
number is the number on which the  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 39 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
Chapter 5  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™  
electronic program guide  
Legal Notice  
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/  
The GUIDE Plus+ system  
OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY  
LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM  
SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE  
GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL  
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/  
OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS  
OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION  
WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY  
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES  
RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system* is a free,  
interactive on-screen television  
programming guide. The system provides  
program listings for all major channels, one-  
touch recording, searching by genre,  
recommendations according to your profile  
and more. The GUIDE Plus+ system is a  
convenient way to find out what's on right  
now or during the coming week, by channel  
or by genre. The GUIDE Plus+ system also  
allows you to automatically set your viewing  
and recording selections quickly and easily.  
1
In order to receive the correct TV listings  
information for your country or region you  
need to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system and  
‘download’ the TV listings information. If you  
haven’t already done this, please turn to  
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system on  
page 35 before proceeding.  
* GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW, VIDEO Plus+,  
G-LINK are (1) registered trademarks or  
trademarks of, (2) manufactured under  
license from and (3) subject of various  
international patents and patent applications  
owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide  
International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates.  
Note  
1 The GUIDE Plus+ system can’t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System (see also Input Line  
System on page 132).  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 40 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
GUIDE Plus+ navigation  
Using the GUIDE Plus+  
system  
The table below shows a summary of the  
remote buttons you’ll use to navigate the  
GUIDE Plus+ system.  
All the various features and areas are colour-  
coded for ease of navigation. All screens  
(with the exception of some setup screens)  
have the following common elements:  
Key  
What it does  
Press to set or cancel One  
Button Recording.  
REC  
Press to display the GUIDE  
Plus+ screen (also use to  
exit).  
GUIDE  
3
4
1
5
ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ  
Use to navigate screens  
(highlight an item).  
RED, GREEN,  
YELLOW, BLUE functionality depending on  
Action buttons that change  
6
2
the Area.  
MENU  
Press to jump directly to the  
Menu bar.  
1 Video window – Allows you to continue  
watching the current program while  
using the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
TIMER REC  
(SHIFT + RED) Schedule area.  
Press to go directly to the  
2 Information panels – Display program  
promotions or instructions on the GUIDE  
Plus+ system.  
Press to display extended  
information for the current  
program.  
INFO  
3 Action bar – Colour-coded Action  
buttons change function depending on  
the area.  
ENTER  
Press to confirm a selection  
or to leave the GUIDE  
Plus+ screen.  
4 Information box – Shows short  
program descriptions or help menus.  
Number  
buttons  
Use for numeric entry.  
5 Menu bar – Gives access to the various  
areas of the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
PREV / Press to select the previous/  
NEXT  
next page of information (in  
the grid, for example).  
6 Grid – Shows TV listings information for  
the next seven days by channel and time.  
ꢋ / ꢌ  
Press to select the previous/  
next day.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 41 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
One-Button-Record  
Lock / Unlock video window  
When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system,  
the channel you were watching remains  
visible in the video window. The date stamp  
above the window lets you know the  
channel, date and time.  
The RED Action button (Record) is visible  
anytime you can highlight a program title,  
including from the Grid, after a search, or in  
your recommendations in the My TV area.  
The program name, date, channel, recording  
start and end times are all set automatically  
when you set a timer recording using One-  
Button-Record.  
The default setting for this window is  
‘locked’, as indicated by a closed padlock  
icon above the video window. When locked,  
the video window always shows the channel  
you were previously watching as you move  
up and down through the listings grid.  
If you need to, you can edit the settings at  
any time before the recording is due to start  
(see Editing a scheduled recording on  
page 46).  
If you prefer, you can unlock the video  
window so that as you highlight different  
channels in the listings grid, that channel is  
shown in the video window.  
1
Highlight a program title.  
1
Highlight a channel logo.  
Channel logos are displayed to the left of  
program titles.  
2
Press the RED Action button (Record).  
The program is now set for recording. When  
the program is due to start, the recorder will  
switch to the correct channel and start  
2
Press the RED Action button (Unlock).  
The padlock icon above the video window  
becomes unlocked. It remains unlocked for  
the remainder of your current TV viewing  
session.  
1
recording .  
• You can also use the REC button to set  
the recording.  
If you want to lock the video window again,  
follow the same procedure. The RED Action  
button will now act as Lock.  
• You can review the shows you have set to  
record in the Schedule Area (see also  
The Schedule Area on page 46).  
Note  
1 Recording times set using the GUIDE Plus+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that  
may occur in the program broadcast schedules.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 42 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
Channel mosaic screen  
The Grid Area  
You can switch the display style of channels  
in the Grid Area, Schedule Area or My TV  
Area from a list to a mosaic of channel icons  
by pressing the YELLOW Action button.  
Select the channel icon you want using the  
cursor buttons, then press ENTER to return  
to the previous screen on that channel.  
The Grid is the main TV listings screen of the  
GUIDE Plus+ system and is the first screen  
that you see when you press GUIDE. You can  
see TV listings for the next seven days,  
starting with the current day.  
When you highlight a program in the Grid,  
you can see information about it in the  
Information Box, including title, synopsis,  
channel, source, time and length. If there is  
an i symbol in the Information Box, it means  
that there is an extended synopsis available.  
Press the INFO button to see it.  
Areas  
The GUIDE Plus+™ system consists of  
seven Areas. All Areas can be accessed from  
the Menu bar.  
In some countries, you can also see a rating  
for a particular program (mostly movies).  
These ratings are provided by local partners,  
such as TV magazines.  
Grid – The GUIDE Plus+ system Home  
Area. Displays TV listings information for  
the next seven days by time and channel.  
From the Grid Area you can:  
Search – Search for TV programs by  
category (e.g., Sport), subcategory (e.g.,  
Football) or keyword.  
• View and scroll through program  
listings.  
• Read program synopsis.  
My TV – Set up a profile and receive  
recommendations according to your  
preferences.  
• Tune to a program that’s currently  
showing.  
1
• Set a program to record.  
Schedule – Show all scheduled  
recordings.  
• Lock or unlock the video window.  
• Access Information panels.  
Info – Area for additional information,  
such as weather (not available in all  
regions).  
Editor – Change channel settings.  
Setup – Setup the GUIDE Plus+™  
system.  
Note  
1 If you’re using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds  
while it tunes to the channel. This is normal.  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 43 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
Browsing the Grid  
Use the following remote buttons to browse  
the grid:  
1
bar.  
Select ‘Search’ from the Menu  
ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ (cursor buttons) – Navigate the  
Grid  
PREV/ꢐ NEXT – Previous / next page  
2
Select a category and a  
ꢋ/ꢌ – Previous / next day  
subcategory.  
BLUE Action button – Return to the current  
time/date in the Grid.  
ENTER – Press on the current selection to  
exit the GUIDE Plus+ system and start  
watching the program.  
The Search Area  
From the Search Area you can:  
• Search by category.  
• Search by subcategory.  
• Search by keyword.  
• Read program synopsis.  
• If you choose All as the subcategory, all  
programs in the category you selected  
will show up in the search results.  
• Tune to a program that’s currently  
showing.  
• Set a program to record.  
• Access Information panels.  
ENTER  
3
Start the search.  
The search results are shown sorted by time  
and date.  
Searching  
You can search for programs by category,  
subcategory or by keyword (My Choice).  
Categories for searching include Movies  
(purple), Sport (green), Children (blue) and  
Others (teal). In some countries there is a  
further subcategory available called ‘Tip of  
the Day’. These are programs recommended  
by a local partner, such as a TV magazine.  
• If no search results are displayed, it  
means there are no programs for the  
current day that match your search  
criteria.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 44 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
Using My Choice keywords for a search  
In addition to the standard categories, you  
can also set your own keywords.  
ENTER  
4
Start the keyword search.  
• You can delete or edit keywords using  
the RED and GREEN Action buttons.  
• When you have set more than two  
keywords, an All subcategory  
automatically appears which allows you  
to search for all your keywords.  
1
Access My Choice.  
My TV Area  
The My TV Area allows you to set up a  
personal profile. You can define a profile by  
channels, themes and/or keywords. As soon  
as a personal profile has been set, the  
GUIDE Plus+ system continuously scans  
the TV listings for the next seven days.  
Whenever you access the My TV Area, a list  
of programs matching your profile appears.  
From the My TV Area you can:  
2
Press the YELLOW Action button to  
• Set up a profile by channel, theme and/  
or keyword.  
add a keyword.  
• Edit and delete profiles.  
• Read program synopsis.  
ENTER  
3
Enter a keyword to appear in  
• Tune to a program that’s currently  
showing.  
the menu.  
• Set a program to record.  
• Access Information panels.  
Setting up a profile  
You can set up a profile with any  
combination of up to 16 channels, four  
categories and 16 keywords.  
1
Select ‘My TV’ from the Menu bar.  
When you’re finished, press the GREEN  
Action button to exit and continue.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 45 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
2
Press the YELLOW Action button to  
set a profile.  
Select a theme from the Search Area  
categories and press ENTER. Repeat this  
step to add up to four categories.  
Channels is now highlighted.  
5
To add a keyword to your profile,  
3
To add a channel to your profile,  
highlight ‘Keywords’ and press the  
YELLOW Action button.  
press the YELLOW Action button.  
Select a channel from the mosaic of channel  
icons and press ENTER. Repeat this step to  
add up to 16 channels.  
Use the ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ buttons followed by  
ENTER to select characters from the on-  
screen keyboard. When you’re finished,  
press the GREEN Action button to exit and  
continue.  
4
To add a theme to your profile,  
highlight ‘Themes’ and press the  
YELLOW Action button.  
6
Press ENTER to activate your profile.  
• You can add up to 16 keywords by  
repeating step 5.  
• You can edit or delete your profile using  
the RED and GREEN Action buttons.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 46 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
The Schedule Area  
The Schedule Area is where you can set, see,  
edit and delete scheduled (timer)  
recordings. (See also Setting a timer  
recording on page 63 for further timer  
recording features.)  
From the Schedule Area you can:  
• Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording.  
• Set, edit or delete a ShowView recording.  
• Set, edit or delete a manual recording.  
Editing a scheduled recording  
You can edit any parameter in a scheduled  
recording, or delete it if you no longer require  
it.  
Use the ꢁ/buttons or the number buttons  
to edit.  
Press the GREEN Action button to go to  
continue, or the RED Action button to go  
back.  
1
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled  
recording.  
4
Enter a name for the scheduled  
recording.  
• If you only want to edit the recording  
quality, frequency, destination, timing or  
genre settings, skip to step 6 below.  
Use the ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ buttons followed by  
ENTER to select characters from the on-  
screen keyboard.  
2
3
Press the GREEN Action button (Edit).  
After entering the whole name, press the  
GREEN Action button to continue.  
Use the cursor and number buttons  
to edit the recording date, start time, end  
time and channel.  
5
Highlight the right recording tile.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 47 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
6
Press the RED Action button (Quality)  
Select from the various options for one-time,  
daily and weekly recordings.  
to change the recording quality.  
8
Press YELLOW Action button  
(Destination) to select the recording  
destination.  
1
Select from AUTO , XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP  
or MN (if manual recording is set to On).  
7
Press the GREEN Action button  
Select from DVD, HDD or HDDr (Auto  
Replace Recording) .  
(Frequency) to change the recording  
frequency.  
2
• Auto Replace Recording is only available  
as an option with regular daily or weekly  
recordings.  
Note  
1 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to  
HDD.  
2 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 139) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is  
off), the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not  
fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make  
the recording to the HDD instead.  
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.  
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start,  
the new timer recording will not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of  
the older two programs will be erased.  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 48 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
9
Press to access the extended  
Deleting a scheduled recording  
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled  
recording options:  
1
recording.  
• If you want to record to a particular HDD  
genre, use the YELLOW Action button  
(Genre) to select one.  
2
Press the RED Action button (Delete).  
The scheduled event is deleted.  
• Use the GREEN Action button (Timing)  
to add extra time to the end of the  
Setting a ShowView™ recording  
recording (+0, +10, +20, +30 or VPS/  
1
PDC (V–P)).  
1
Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.  
• Press to display the standard  
recording options again.  
Note  
1 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer  
recording is due to start for it to work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch  
the recorder into standby.  
• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.  
• Up to 8 timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.  
• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from an external input, or when the recording mode is set to  
AUTO.  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 49 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
2
Press the RED Action button  
3
Use the number and ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ  
(ShowView).  
buttons to enter the recording date, then  
press the GREEN Action button (Next).  
3
Use the number buttons to enter a  
ShowView programming number.  
4
In the same way, enter the recording  
start time, followed by the GREEN Action  
button (Next) to confirm.  
• If you live in an area not yet covered by  
the GUIDE Plus+ system you may also  
have to input a channel number. Follow  
the on-screen display to do this.  
5
Enter the recording end time in the  
same way, followed by the GREEN Action  
button (Next) to confirm.  
4
Press ENTER to confirm.  
6
Use the number buttons to enter a  
channel number, then press the GREEN  
Action button (Next) to confirm.  
Setting a manual recording  
1 Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.  
Alternatively, you can press the YELLOW  
Action button (Mosaic) and use the ꢁ/ꢂ/  
ꢃ/ꢀ buttons to select a channel from the  
mosaic, followed by ENTER.  
2
Press the GREEN Action button  
(Manual).  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 50 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
Switching a channel on/off  
The Info Area  
You can choose whether or not to display a  
channel in the Grid Area by switching the  
channel on or off in the Editor Area.  
This area is reserved for additional  
information such as news, weather reports,  
stock quotes, and so on, and varies by  
region. (Note that this feature is not available  
in all countries/regions.)  
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.  
The Editor Area  
The Editor Area is the central location for you  
to manage your channels. Any changes you  
make here will affect what is displayed in the  
Grid Area. The Editor Area is mainly used  
when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to  
make any manual changes as necessary.  
You can also use the Editor Area if new  
channels become available in your area, or if  
you change from cable to satellite, say, or  
move house.  
2
Highlight the left channel tile of the  
From the Editor Area you can:  
channel you want to switch on or off.  
• Display/hide channels in the grid (switch  
the channel on/off).  
3
Press the RED Action button to switch  
the channel on or off.  
• Select a channel source (Tuner, Ext.  
Rec. 1, Ext. Rec. 2, etc.).  
Changing the source and program  
number  
• Enter a channel program number.  
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 51 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
2
Highlight the right channel tile of the  
2
Highlight the part you want to  
channel you want to make a change to.  
change.  
3
Press the RED Action button to  
change the channel source, or the GREEN  
Action button to enter a program  
number.  
Each press of the RED Action button  
changes the channel source (Tuner, Ext.  
Rec. 1, etc.). To set a program number, use  
the number buttons to enter a program  
number then press ENTER (When set to  
Tuner, make sure that the program number  
matches the preset number of this recorder  
for what you want to record).  
You can change the Language, Country,  
Postal Code and the External Receiver  
settings.  
The Setup Area  
1
The Setup Area is where you can set up the  
GUIDE Plus+ system for your particular  
region, TV reception conditions, and so on.  
3
Press ENTER to confirm.  
Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+  
setup  
Manual Host Channel setup  
The GUIDE Plus+ system will automatically  
identify your Host Channel as soon as the  
recorder is put into standby for the first time.  
See the table on page 37 for a list of all the  
European Host Channels.  
1
Select ‘Setup’ from the Menu bar.  
Press ENTER to access the Basic Setup screen.  
If you know your Host Channel details  
(source and program number) or if the  
automatic identification did not provide the  
expected result, you can identify your Host  
Channel manually. Select Host Channel  
Setup in the Setup area and follow the  
instructions on the TV. Select the correct  
source (e.g., internal tuner or external  
receiver) and enter the respective program  
number (e.g., if you have to press 9 on the  
remote to watch your Host Channel, enter 9  
Basic Setup  
Host Channel Setup  
GUIDE Plus+ System Information  
Note  
1 Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information.  
This can take up to 24 hours.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 52 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
as the program number). When you next  
switch the recorder into standby the GUIDE  
Plus+ system will complete the Host  
Channel setup.  
screen prompts to make sure that the  
GUIDE Plus+ system can change  
channels on your external receiver. If it  
does not work, repeat the process,  
choosing different reception and  
external receiver combinations until you  
have tried all the codes for your brand of  
receiver that are already in the GUIDE  
Plus+ system. If it still does not work,  
see below on how to receive new codes  
overnight.  
You can reset the Host Channel settings at  
any time back to the default setting of  
automatic. Please be aware that resetting  
the Host Channel will erase all TV listings  
data.  
– The unit has not yet received new  
codes. The nightly data downloads  
frequently include new codes for  
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and  
troubleshooting  
controlling external receivers. Please  
tune your external receiver to your local  
host channel and leave it on overnight.  
Switch this recorder into standby. The  
next morning, please perform the GUIDE  
Plus+ setup again to see if your external  
receiver can now be controlled.  
This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a  
complete list please consult the GUIDE  
Plus+ website at:  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
FAQ  
– The external receiver that you use is  
currently not supported. If, after leaving  
your external receiver on overnight, and  
doing the Reception and External  
• When I tried setting up my external  
receiver I could not get any of the  
attempts to work, what should I do?  
Receiver Setup again, it still does not  
respond, please call Customer Support  
to report your brand and model.  
A: There could be several reasons why  
your external receiver could not be  
controlled.  
• My external receiver was successfully  
setup. However I have found that when  
the GUIDE Plus+ system has to change  
to a channel with a 3-digit program  
number in the external receiver's preset, it  
does not work. It looks like the GUIDE  
Plus+ system can only send two digits.  
– The connections could be wrong. Make  
sure that the G-LINK cable is connected  
to the G-LINK connector on the recorder  
and the IR blaster is in front of the  
external receiver, pointing towards the  
IR receiver of your external receiver. See  
Connecting to a cable box, satellite  
receiver or digital terrestrial receiver on  
page 18.  
With the number of channels  
increasing, the number of digits has  
increased as well. While older boxes use  
only 2 digits, newer boxes require up to 4.  
It is possible that you selected an older  
code for your brand during set-up.  
Please access the Setup Area, select  
External Receiver and repeat the setup  
for your brand (Note: Every time you see  
– The code that is listed under your  
brand could be wrong. Please try other  
codes for your brand under satellite,  
cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area  
and choose one of the three options  
(cable, satellite or terrestrial) that you  
have not already tried. Follow the on-  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 53 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
the on-screen question about whether  
the receiver has changed to a certain  
channel, the GUIDE Plus+ system has  
sent a different code). Try all the different  
codes until your GUIDE Plus+ system  
can control your external receiver  
correctly. If you have no success, try to  
receive new codes overnight.  
– The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was  
completed incorrectly. Try setting it up  
again (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™  
system on page 35).  
– Your cabling and setup is OK, but the  
recorder has not been connected for  
enough time to receive the TV listings  
data. Leave the recorder in standby  
overnight.  
• I used to receive data through my  
terrestrial antenna or analog cable  
without a set-top box. Now, I have  
“upgraded” to a satellite system or to  
digital cable with external receiver. What  
should I do to receive data for the GUIDE  
Plus+ system?  
– For external receiver users only: The  
connections and setup are OK, but the  
external receiver was not tuned to the  
correct host channel. Check the list of  
host channels (see step 5 of Setting up  
the GUIDE Plus+™ system on page 35)  
and leave the recorder in standby and  
the external receiver on overnight tuned  
to the correct host channel.  
You can try to receive your host channel  
through your new reception method. If  
you have problems to receive data we  
recommend that you keep your analog  
terrestrial or cable connection only to  
receive data this way. It is important that  
you identify your host channel correctly  
in the Editor Area.  
– You live in a country/region where the  
GUIDE Plus+ system is not yet available.  
Check the list of countries to see if you  
are in a region that is supported.  
• I used the One-Button-Record feature (red  
Action button) to set a recording, but I  
recorded the wrong channel.  
• After I performed the initial set-up I found  
that the line-up for all the channels  
received via the external set top box is  
incorrect. How do I correct this?  
If the channel to be recorded is received  
via the external receiver first make sure  
that the external receiver was left  
switched on. Next, in the Editor Area,  
make sure that the channel to be  
recorded is correctly set: Access the  
Editor Area. Check the source and  
program number of the channel that you  
wanted to record. Change the source  
and preset numbers if incorrect.  
You can change the line-up in the editor  
according to your preferences. Access  
the Editor Area. Select the channels that  
you would like to change. Change the  
source and preset number according to  
your preferences.  
• I performed the set-up but after many  
hours I still have a blank EPG what is  
going wrong?  
If you are recording from the recorder’s  
internal tuner (the Tuner setting), make  
sure that the program number is the  
same as the preset number set on this  
recorder. If they are different, go to the  
Editor Area and change the program  
number to match the recorder’s preset  
number.  
There are several possibilities:  
– Connections are wrong. See  
Connecting up on page 14 to double  
check everything.  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 54 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
05  
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide  
• The TV listings information doesn’t  
update.  
The latest TV listings information is  
automatically downloaded by the  
recorder overnight. This only happens if  
the recorder is in standby; if the recorder  
is left on, it will not download. When not  
using the recorder, please switch it into  
standby.  
Data downloads can take several hours.  
The front panel display shows EPG when  
downloading. If you switch the recorder  
on while EPG is displayed, the download  
will be canceled.  
• The GUIDE Plus+ system is not  
supported in my area, but when I switch  
the recorder into standby, after a while the  
front panel display shows EPG. Can I stop  
this from happening?  
If the GUIDE Plus+ system is not  
supported in your area, please do not set  
the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+  
setup (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™  
system on page 35). When the GUIDE  
Plus+ service starts in your area, please  
set the postal code again.  
• The automatic Host Channel search  
failed or the GUIDE Plus+ system  
identified the wrong Host Channel for my  
region.  
You can identify your Host Channel  
manually. See Manual Host Channel  
setup on page 51 for how to do this.  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 55 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
CRhaepcteor 6rding  
About DVD recording  
Max.  
chapters  
(per title)  
Disc type/rec.  
format  
Max. titles  
(per disc)  
This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-  
RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R  
DL and DVD+R DL media.  
DVD-R/-RW  
Video mode  
99  
99  
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized  
for Video mode or VR mode recording. Each  
has its advantages, and it depends on what  
you want to do with the recording which  
mode you choose.  
*1  
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM  
VR mode  
99  
49  
999  
*2  
DVD+R/+RW  
99  
If you want to edit your recordings in any  
significant way, VR mode offers greater  
possibilities for cutting, copying, and  
changing the way the video is presented.  
*1 A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc.  
*2  
A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc.  
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to  
editing, but it has the advantage that it is  
compatible with standard DVD players  
• This recorder cannot play or record  
unfinalized Video mode and DVD+R  
discs recorded on another recorder.  
DVD+RW discs recorded on another  
recorder are playable on this recorder  
but are not recordable.  
1
(many of which won’t play VR mode discs ).  
Once a disc is initialized for a particular  
mode, all recording on that disc will be in  
that mode.  
• The maximum continuous recording  
time for one title is eight hours when  
using a DVD+R/+RW disc.  
DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR  
mode recording.  
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW  
disc, the total number of recordable  
titles remaining may not increase.  
DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR  
mode recording.  
DVD+R discs do not require initializing.  
• Although this recorder can record PAL,  
SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix  
multiple TV line systems on one disc. A  
disc can contain PAL and SECAM  
recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See  
also Additional information about the TV  
system settings on page 144.  
Important  
The table below shows the maximum  
number of titles recordable per disc and the  
maximum number of chapters per title:  
Note  
1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating  
instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 56 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
• Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on  
a disc can affect playback and/or  
recording performance. Please take  
proper care of your discs.  
About HDD recording  
Recording to the internal hard disk drive  
(HDD) is very flexible; you have the full  
choice of recording quality options,  
including manual mode, and of course you  
can record, erase and re-record as many  
times as you like.  
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for  
recording failure due to power cuts,  
defective discs, or damage to the  
recorder.  
• See also Disc / content format playback  
compatibility on page 7 for detailed disc  
compatibility information.  
The capacity of the hard disk drive means  
that you can store many hours of video on it,  
even using the higher quality recording  
modes.  
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL  
discs  
Important  
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is  
generally the same as recording to regular  
single-layer discs; however, please note the  
following points:  
• The maximum number of titles/chapters  
per title that can be recorded on the  
HDD is 999 and 99 respectively. No more  
recording is possible on the HDD after  
the maximum number of titles has been  
reached.  
• When the recorder switches from the  
first layer to the second during recording  
a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc, a new  
title is automatically started on the new  
layer.  
• The maximum continuous recording  
time for one title is 12 hours.  
• It is possible to record both PAL and  
NTSC titles on the HDD. Before  
recording, you need to make sure that  
the Input Line System setting (page 144)  
matches the TV line system of the source  
you’re recording.  
• Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a  
DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc. If the 99th  
title is being recorded when the layer is  
switched, recording will stop.  
• Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a  
DVD+R DL disc.  
• You cannot play, record additional  
material to, edit or finalize a DVD-R DL or  
DVD+R DL disc that has been recorded  
on but not yet finalized on another DVD  
recorder.  
HDD Video mode compatibility  
When recording to the HDD you can choose  
to record in one of two formats. Set the  
format from the HDD Recording Format  
item in the Initial Setup menu (see  
page 140).  
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed  
copying from HDD to Video mode DVD-R/-  
RW or DVD+R/+RW is possible. When  
recording a bilingual broadcast, set which  
channel you want to record from the Initial  
Setup menu (see Bilingual Recording on  
page 136).  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 57 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video  
Mode Off, high-speed copying isn’t possible.  
However, both channels of bilingual  
broadcasts are recorded and you can switch  
the audio on playback.  
When recording a TV broadcast or through  
an external input, you can display copy  
control information on screen. (see  
Displaying disc information on-screen on  
page 83).  
CPRM  
Recorded audio  
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling  
system developed for the recording of ‘copy  
once’ broadcast programs. CPRM stands for  
Content Protection for Recordable Media.  
In all except the LPCM mode, sound is  
recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format  
(only Dolby Digital 2.0 can be recorded; Dolby  
Digital 5.1 recording is not possible). When  
set to LPCM, sound is recorded in high  
quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format.  
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which  
means that you can record copy-once  
broadcast programs, but you cannot then  
make a copy of those recordings. CPRM  
recordings can only be made on CPRM-  
compatible DVD-R (ver. 2.0 / 8x or higher) or  
DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted  
in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the HDD.  
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you  
are recording to Video mode DVD-R/-RW,  
DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD with the HDD  
Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or  
on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual  
Recording setting (page 136) to select the  
A/L or B/R audio channel to record before  
recording starts. In other cases, both  
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played  
on players that are specifically compatible  
with CPRM.  
channels of a bilingual broadcast will be  
recorded and you can switch on playback.  
Recording equipment and  
copyright  
Recording equipment should be used only  
for lawful copying and you are advised to  
check carefully what is lawful copying in the  
country in which you are making a copy.  
Copying of copyright material such as films  
or music is unlawful unless permitted by a  
legal exception or consented to by the  
rightowners.  
This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by method claims of  
certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property  
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other  
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
Restrictions on video  
recording  
You cannot record copy-protected video  
using this recorder. Copy-protected video  
includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite  
broadcasts. If copy-protected material is  
encountered during a recording, recording  
will pause automatically and an error  
message will be displayed on-screen.  
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be  
recorded to HDD, CPRM-compatible VR  
mode DVD-R/-RW (see below), or DVD-RAM.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 58 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you  
can also select the language.  
Using the built-in TV tuner  
There are three different ways to select TV  
channels. Note that you can’t change the TV  
channel during playback, recording or  
during recording standby.  
NICAM A  
Regular  
NICAM B  
NICAM A+B  
• You can also select the language for a  
non-NICAM bilingual broadcast.  
CHANNEL  
+
A (L)  
B (R)  
CHANNEL +/– buttons  
CHANNEL  
A + B (L+R)  
REC MODE  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
PLAY MODE  
• When watching a recording made from  
an external input with Bilingual  
recording selected (see External Audio  
on page 136), you can switch the audio  
channel between left (L), right (R) or both  
(L+R).  
Number buttons  
For example, to select channel 4, press 4  
then ENTER; for channel 34, press 3, 4,  
ENTER.  
1
L
R
CH +/– buttons on the front panel  
L+R  
Changing audio channels  
You can change the audio channel of the  
broadcast or external input signal.  
Note  
• When recording to the HDD with HDD  
Recording Format set to Video Mode On,  
to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM  
setting, only one channel of a bilingual  
broadcast is recorded. In this case,  
decide which language you want to  
record before recording by setting the  
Bilingual Recording setting (see  
SHIFT  
AUDIO  
+
Press to change the audio  
type.  
The current audio channel is displayed on-  
screen.  
• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM  
Select on page 136) is set to NICAM and  
you are watching a NICAM broadcast,  
you can switch between NICAM and  
Regular (non-NICAM) audio.  
Bilingual Recording on page 136).  
Switching between TV and DVD  
When the recorder is stopped or recording  
you can choose whether to have the audio/  
video from the built-in TV tuner (or external  
input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’), or  
watch the channel that the TV is currently set  
to (‘TV mode’).  
NICAM  
Regular  
Note  
1 Channel presets are numbered 1 to 99.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 59 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
REC MODE  
SHIFT  
During playback or when a menu is being  
displayed on-screen, the sound and video is  
always routed to your TV and is unaffected by  
the TV/DVD mode setting.  
+
Press repeatedly to select  
the recording quality.  
XP – High quality setting, gives about  
one hour of recording time on a DVD  
disc.  
Note that the recorder must be connected to  
your TV using a SCART cable to be able to  
use this feature.  
SP (Standard Play) – Default quality,  
used for most applications, gives about  
two hours of recording time on a DVD.  
TV/DVD  
Switch between TV mode and  
LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than  
SP, but doubles the recording time on a  
DVD to about four hours.  
DVD mode.  
EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than  
LP, but gives about six hours of  
recording time on a DVD disc.  
Setting the picture quality/  
recording time  
SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality  
than EP, but gives about eight hours of  
recording time on a DVD disc.  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
HDD  
SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest  
video quality but gives about ten hours of  
recording time on a DVD disc.  
Before starting a recording, you will usually  
want to set the picture quality/recording  
time. There are six standard settings  
available, which allow you to choose a  
balance between picture quality and  
recording time.  
1
MN1 to MN32 / LPCM – Manual /  
Linear PCM (available only when manual  
recording is on)  
The setting is indicated in the front panel  
display, and shown on-screen together with  
the recording time for a blank recordable  
disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the  
approximate remaining recording time for  
that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On  
Screen Display setting (see On Screen  
Display on page 143) is Off then this  
information is not displayed.)  
When Manual Recording is set to On (see  
Manual Recording on page 139), a further  
option will be available (MN1 to MN32 or  
LPCM, depending on what you set).  
When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the  
longest recording time available. If you  
select SEP or MN1 to MN3, the recording  
mode will automatically revert to SLP.  
Note  
1 Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broad-  
cast, select which audio channel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 136).  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 60 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
REC MODE  
SHIFT  
Basic recording from the TV  
+
3
Set the picture quality/  
recording time.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording  
time on page 59 for detailed instructions.  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
HDD  
SHIFT  
AUDIO  
+
4
Select the audio channel to  
Basic recording from the TV involves just  
setting the channel to record, choosing  
whether to record to the HDD or a DVD and  
selecting the recording quality.  
record.  
See Changing audio channels on page 58 for  
more on this.  
• When recording in VR mode, if a  
broadcast is bilingual, both audio  
channels are recorded, allowing you to  
switch the audio channel on playback.  
The only exception to this is when the  
picture quality is set to LPCM, in which  
case you do need to select the audio  
channel before recording.  
HDD/DVD  
1
Select the HDD or DVD for  
recording.  
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a  
recordable disc (if you load a new blank  
DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder  
takes a short while to initialize the disc).  
REC  
• If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R  
or a Video mode DVD-RW, you must  
initialize it before proceeding (see  
Initializing recordable DVD discs on  
page 70).  
5
Start recording.  
If you want to set a recording end time, press  
the REC button repeatedly. The recording  
time increases in 30 minute increments, up  
to a maximum of six hours. The time the  
recording will end is shown on-screen and in  
the front panel display. When the recording  
ends, the recorder automatically switches  
into standby if no other operation is being  
performed.  
CHANNEL  
+
CHANNEL  
2
Select a TV channel to record.  
The front panel display shows the channel  
number:  
• To cancel the set recording time, press  
REC.  
• If you want to pause recording at any  
time , press PAUSE. Press again to  
Channel preset  
1
• While the recorder is stopped, you can  
also use the number buttons on the  
remote to select the channel (e.g., for  
channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER).  
restart the recording (If recording to the  
HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a new  
chapter is started after recording  
restarts).  
• If the recorder is stopped, you can also  
use the CH +/– buttons on the front  
panel to select the channel number.  
Note  
1 Except during Chase Play.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 61 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
STOP REC  
Setting up for Pause Live TV  
You can use the Pause Live TV feature with  
an AV Link-compatible TV connected using a  
SCART cable (see TV tuner setup for Pause  
Live TV below), or using this recorder’s  
internal tuner (see Using the recorder’s  
internal tuner for Pause Live TV below).  
6
Press to stop recording.  
• If you set the recording time in the  
previous step, you can still stop the  
recording anytime by pressing STOP  
REC.  
• Recording will stop automatically when  
there is no more space on the HDD/  
DVD, or after 12 hours of HDD recording  
(whichever is sooner).  
TV tuner setup for Pause Live TV  
To use this feature with an external TV tuner,  
the recorder must be connected to your TV  
using a SCART cable, and the AV Link setting  
(page 144) should be set to This Recorder  
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer  
programs that are programmed to start  
at the same time, then the program that  
actually starts first takes priority.  
1
Only. See also Pause Live TV on page 133 for  
more on this.  
In order to use Pause Live TV, make the  
following connections and settings.  
Tip  
• During recording you can turn on/off the  
SCART loop through function. During  
recording, press the front panel CH +  
button to switch to SCART THRU (loop  
through on), or CH – to switch to SCART  
NORM (loop through off). Loop through  
is automatically reset to off after  
recording has finished. Note that you  
can’t switch loop through on if recording  
from the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) or  
AV1(RGB)-TV connectors.  
• Pause Live TV will not work as expected  
when watching TV via an external  
component such as a VCR or digital  
tuner. It only works with the channel  
selected on the TV.  
1
Connect this recorder to your TV with  
a SCART cable.  
2
3
Press HOME MENU.  
Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Analog Tuner’  
> ‘Auto Channel Setting’ > ‘Download  
from TV’.  
• If the Download from TV option appears  
grayed out, check the connections to  
your TV and try again.  
Pause Live TV  
HDD  
• Depending on your TV, you might have to  
switch off and unplug it for a few  
moments before plugging it back in and  
switching on.  
The Pause Live TV feature lets you effectively  
pause a TV program you’re watching. When  
you’re ready to resume watching, just press  
the PLAY button.  
4
Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Note  
1 • Not all TVs support this feature. Check the instructions that came with your TV if you’re not sure.  
• This feature will not work unless your TV is compatible with AV Link. See the operating instructions that came  
with your TV if you’re unsure about your TV’s compatibility with this feature.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 62 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
STOP REC  
Using the recorder’s internal tuner for  
Pause Live TV  
3
Press to stop the recording.  
The operation is slightly different depending  
on the viewing source. See the Operation  
table below for details.  
If you haven’t connected to your TV using a  
SCART cable (or your TV is not compatible  
with AV Link) you can use the recorder’s  
internal tuner for the Pause Live TV.  
1
Press HOME MENU.  
Tip  
• When the Pause Live TV setting (see  
page 133) is set to TV’s Tuner, you can  
press PAUSE LIVE TV while the recorder  
is in standby to switch on and  
immediately start recording. When set to  
Recorder’s Tuner, it is not possible to  
use the Pause Live TV feature from  
standby.  
2
Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Basic’ > ‘Pause  
Live TV’ > ‘Recorder’s Tuner’.  
See Pause Live TV on page 133 to do this.  
You can record the channel selected on the  
recorder.  
Using Pause Live TV  
PAUSE LIVE TV  
• After pressing PAUSE LIVE TV, it will  
take at least 10 seconds for the picture to  
change (during this time, all controls  
except the power button are inoperative).  
(Note that startup from standby is not  
possible if you have selected Recorder’s  
Tuner in Pause Live TV on page 133.)  
1
Start recording the current TV  
channel.  
Recording continues with playback paused.  
• Note that it may take up to 10 seconds  
for recording to start.  
PLAY  
2
Press to start playback.  
• Please note that you can’t record from  
another component (VCR, etc.) that is  
connected by a SCART cable to the AV2/  
(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector using  
the Pause Live TV feature.  
You can also use the scan buttons (ꢋ/  
), pause (PAUSE) and stop  
(STOP)—all without affecting the  
recording.  
Operation table  
TV/DVD  
mode of DVR source  
DVR  
Pause Live TV  
function button  
Viewing source  
Condition  
TV built-in analog  
tuner  
TV  
Pause Live TV  
Preset channel of DVR and TV are  
matched after downloading from TV  
Direct TV recording*1  
Direct TV recording*1  
Preset channel of DVR and TV are NOT  
matched after downloading from TV.  
Record TV program that you’re watching.  
TV built-in digital  
tuner  
TV  
Preset channel info. in D.TV cannot be  
shared by DVR even after Download from  
TV. Record TV program that you’re  
watching.  
Direct TV recording*1  
External input of TV  
TV  
Record TV program that you’re watching.  
DVR built-in analog  
tuner  
DVD  
DVR built-in Pause Live TV  
analog tuner  
*1 No Chase Play! Warning if you change input this will stop the recording.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 63 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record  
Setting a timer recording  
to DVD but there isn’t a recordable DVD  
loaded at the time of the recording, the  
Recovery Recording feature will  
automatically record the program to the  
HDD for you.  
A L L  
Using the timer recording features you can  
program up to 32 timer recordings up to a  
month in advance. Timer recording  
programs can be set to record just once,  
every day, or every week.  
This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video  
Programming System) and PDC (Program  
Delivery Control) systems used by many TV  
stations to ensure that a timer recording  
catches the whole program even when the  
program is not running to schedule. Up to  
eight timer programs can be set with VPS/  
PDC on.  
There are two ways to program a timer  
recording; using the GUIDE Plus+ system  
(see The Schedule Area on page 46) or using  
the Easy Timer Recording feature (see Easy  
Timer Recording on page 64).  
You can set the recording quality for your  
timer recording in the same way as for a  
regular recording, but with the added option  
of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the  
recording quality for the space available on  
the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a  
blank DVD disc (if recording to HDD).  
Important  
• A timer recording can’t be set if there are  
already 32 timer programs waiting to be  
recorded.  
• Timer recording will not start if:  
– The recorder is already recording.  
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or  
unfinalized.  
You can set timer recordings to record to a  
recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For  
regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer  
• Timer recording will start when the  
operation preventing timer recording  
has finished.  
recordings that you don’t need to keep, you  
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature  
to automatically replace the previous timer  
recording with the new one. Note that when  
you use this feature, the previous recording  
made on that timer program will be replaced  
by the next one, regardless of whether you  
have watched it yet or not.  
• The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front  
panel display when the timer is active. If  
the indicator is blinking it means that  
(for a DVD timer recording) there is no  
disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not  
recordable (for an HDD timer recording  
it means that the HDD is not recordable).  
You can also set the recorder so that it will  
adjust the recording quality to try and fit the  
recording on to the disc if it would not  
otherwise fit at the recording quality you set  
(see Optimized Rec on page 139 for more on  
this).  
• Approximately two minutes before a  
timer recording is set to start, the  
recorder will go into timer recording  
standby. In timer recording standby you  
cannot use some functions.  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 64 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
REC MODE  
SHIFT  
• The maximum length for timer  
3
+
Set the recording quality.  
recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours.  
However, because one title (HDD) is  
limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12  
hours will be spread over two titles. Note  
that there will be a break in the recording  
of a few seconds between titles.  
DVD recording: The AUTO option  
automatically sets the best recording  
quality for the space available on the  
disc loaded at the time of recording.  
HDD recording: The AUTO option  
automatically sets the best recording  
quality that would fit on to a blank DVD  
disc.  
• VPS/PDC may not work with all  
broadcast stations in your country/area.  
Check with the stations for compatibility.  
HDD/DVD  
• The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the  
morning are used by the GUIDE Plus+  
system to download program  
information. During these times, VPS/  
PDC may not work reliably; leave VPS/  
PDC off if you set a timer recording for  
these times.  
4
Select the HDD or DVD for  
recording.  
5
Move the cursor to the  
recording start date and time on the grid.  
• You can move the cursor forward or back  
an hour at a time using the and ꢌ  
buttons.  
Easy Timer Recording  
As the name suggests, Easy Timer  
Recording makes setting up a timer  
1
Current time  
recording as simple as possible.  
Recording start time  
HOME MENU  
1
Select ‘Easy Timer’ from the  
Easy Timer Recording  
Home Menu.  
8:00  
9:00  
10:00  
11:00  
12:00  
13:00  
14:00  
DVR-645H-S only: You must first select  
Timer Recording from the Home Menu  
to access the Easy Timer setup.  
1/01  
2/01  
3/01  
SAT  
1/01 11:45 – :–  
PREV  
NEXT  
REC MODE  
HDD/DVD  
Pr 7  
SP  
HDD  
2
Set the TV channel to record.  
Each row of the grid is one day (you can set  
the timer recording for up to a month in  
advance). Each column is a 15 minute  
interval.  
Easy Timer Recording  
8:00  
9:00  
10:00  
11:00  
12:00  
13:00  
14:00  
1/01  
2/01  
3/01  
The darker area represents time that has  
already passed and can’t therefore be  
selected. The lighter area is time that’s  
available.  
SAT  
1/01  
9:30 – :–  
REC MODE  
HDD/DVD  
SP  
HDD  
Pr 7  
Note  
1 You can’t use VPS/PDC with Easy Timer Recording. Set a scheduled recording using the GUIDE Plus+ system  
if you want to use VPS/PDC.  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 65 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
Extending a timer recording in  
progress  
You can extend a timer recording beyond the  
programmed end time. This can be useful if  
a broadcast program overruns, for example.  
ENTER  
6
Set the start time.  
The start date and time is displayed in the  
middle of the screen.  
• You can go back and reset the start time  
if you need to by pressing RETURN.  
Canceling or extending the timer  
REC  
7
Move the cursor to the  
1
Press and hold for three seconds  
recording end time on the grid.  
during a timer recording.  
Recording start time  
Recording end time  
Recording continues, but the timer indicator  
disappears from the front panel display  
indicating that the timer has been canceled.  
Easy Timer Recording  
REC  
11:00  
12:00  
13:00  
14:00  
15:00  
16:00  
17:00  
1/01  
2/01  
3/01  
2
Press repeatedly to extend  
recording in 30 minute blocks.  
SAT  
1/01  
11:45 – 13:45  
Stopping a timer recording  
HDD/DVD  
REC MODE  
Pr 7  
SP  
HDD  
STOP REC  
As you move the cursor around the grid, an  
arrow stretches from the start time to the  
current cursor position, representing the  
length of the recording. A recording of up to  
six hours can be set.  
1
2
Press during a timer recording.  
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Preventing use of the recorder  
before a timer recording (child  
8
Set the end time.  
lock)  
You can make all the front panel and remote  
control buttons inoperative using the child  
lock feature. This is useful when you set a  
timer recording and want to make sure that  
the timer settings are not changed before  
recording has finished.  
9
Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer  
recording and exit, or ‘No’ to go back to  
the Easy Timer Recording screen.  
• You can check the timer recording  
details you just set from the Schedule  
Area in the GUIDE Plus+ system; see  
The Schedule Area on page 46.  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 66 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
STANDBY/ON  
finished. If two programs have the same  
times (but different channels, for  
example), the program set most recently  
takes priority.  
1
If the recorder is on, switch it  
into standby.  
2
[Front panel] Press and hold for  
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer  
programs that are programmed to start  
at the same time, then the program that  
actually starts first takes priority.  
three seconds to lock the controls.  
The front panel display briefly shows LOCK.  
If any buttons are pressed on the remote or  
front panel, LOCK is briefly displayed again.  
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold  
STOP on the front panel (while the  
recorder is stopped) for three seconds  
until the display shows UNLOCK.  
Simultaneous recording and  
playback (Chase Play)  
Timer recording FAQ  
HDD  
Chase Play allows you to watch a recording  
that is still in progress from the start, without  
having to wait until the recording has  
finished (i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the  
recording).  
Frequently Asked Questions  
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder  
doesn’t start recording!  
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is  
recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on  
page 125), and that there are fewer than  
99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.  
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching  
the recording in progress. You can watch  
anything else already on the HDD (or on a  
DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by  
selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen  
(see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable  
discs and the HDD on page 76).  
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer  
program! Why not?  
You can’t enter a timer program if the  
clock isn’t set.  
DVR-645H-S: Chase Play is not possible  
when DV is the recording input.  
• What happens when two or more timer  
programs overlap?  
PLAY  
Press during recording to start  
Basically, the program with the earlier  
recording start time has priority.  
However, the recorder will start  
playback from the beginning of the  
1
current recording .  
recording the program with the later  
start time after the earlier program is  
DISC  
NAVIGATOR  
Press during recording to select  
another title to play.  
Note  
1 You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work  
while copying or backing up.  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 67 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
1
You can use all the usual playback controls,  
such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and  
skip.  
AV2/L1 – Input 1  
L2 – Input 2 (front panel)  
L3 – Input 3  
• To stop playback, press STOP  
Check that the Audio In settings for  
External Audio and Bilingual Recording  
are as you want them (see Audio In on  
page 136).  
(recording will continue).  
• To stop recording, press STOP REC  
(playback will continue).  
• During recording or in timer recording  
standby, you can’t play an HDD title,  
DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc if the  
Input Line System setting doesn’t match  
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title  
(see also Additional information about  
the TV system settings on page 144).  
Also, during simultaneous recording  
and playback, if the TV line system of the  
playback track/title changes then  
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed  
or stretched), adjust on the source  
component or your TV before recording.  
DVR-645H-S only: To watch video coming  
in via the DV input (front panel), select  
DV > DV Video Playback from the  
Home Menu (see also Playing from a DV  
camcorder on page 85).  
SHIFT  
playback will automatically stop.  
3
4
+
REC MODE Set the recording quality.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording  
time on page 59 for detailed information.  
Recording from an external  
component  
HDD/DVD  
Select the HDD or DVD for  
recording.  
REC  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
HDD  
5
Press to start recording.  
• If your source is copy-protected using  
Copy Guard, you will not be able to  
record it. See Restrictions on video  
recording on page 57 for more details.  
You can record from an external component,  
such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to  
one of the recorder’s external inputs.  
1
Make sure that the component you  
want to record from is connected  
properly to the DVD recorder.  
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for  
connection options.  
2
INPUT SELECT Press repeatedly to select one of  
the external inputs to record from.  
The current input is shown on-screen and in  
the front panel display:  
Note  
1 This cannot be selected if AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 135).  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 68 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
Finalizing a disc  
Playing your recordings on  
other DVD players  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW  
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc  
so that it can be played on a regular DVD  
player or computer equipped with a suitable  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW  
Most regular DVD players can play finalized  
discs recorded in Video mode and DVD+R  
discs. A number of players (including many  
Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW  
discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not.  
Most players will not play VR mode DVD-R  
discs, although some DVD-ROM drives and  
DVD recorders may be able to (finalization  
might be necessary). Check the manual that  
came with the player to check what kinds of  
discs it will play.  
1
DVD-ROM drive.  
Note that the disc name will appear in the  
title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure  
the disc name is as you want it before you  
finalize the disc as it can’t be changed  
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc,  
see Input Disc Name on page 125 before  
starting the steps below.  
DVD+RW discs don’t generally need  
finalizing. However, if you want a title menu  
to appear when you play the disc, then you  
will need to finalize. When using a  
DVD+RW, you can still record and edit even  
after finalizing. although the title menu will  
disappear if you do so. Finalize the disc  
again to generate a new title menu.  
When you finalize a Video mode or DVD+R  
disc, a title menu is created from which you  
can select titles when you play the disc.  
There are a number of different styles of title  
menu to choose from to suit the content of  
the disc.  
All the title menus are navigated in the usual  
way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to  
display the menu, then using the ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/  
followed by ENTER to select titles and  
start playback.  
Important  
• Once you’ve finalized a Video mode or  
DVD+R disc, you can’t edit or record  
anything else on that disc. However, the  
finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe  
‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 126  
for how to do this.  
• A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-  
R DL) disc can still be recorded and  
edited on this recorder even after  
finalizing.  
Note  
1 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize  
the disc. See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 144 for how to change the recorder’s  
setting.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 69 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
• Video mode DVD-R DL discs and  
DVD+R DL discs must be finalized in  
order to play in other recorders/players.  
Note however that some recorders/  
players will not play even finalized dual-  
layer discs.  
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the  
Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not  
support this feature. These discs will  
have only a text title menu when finalized  
on this recorder.  
5
The recorder will now start finalizing  
1
Load the disc you want to finalize.  
the disc.  
During finalization:  
Make sure that the recorder is stopped  
before proceeding.  
• If the finalization process of a DVD-RW  
or DVD+R/+RW disc is going to take  
more than around four minutes, you can  
press ENTER to cancel. Around four  
minutes before completion, the option to  
cancel disappears.  
HOME MENU  
2
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
ENTER  
• You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR  
mode DVD-R disc.  
3
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ >  
‘Next Screen’.  
• How long finalization takes depends on  
the type of disc, how much is recorded  
on the disc and the number of titles on  
the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can  
take up to one hour to finalize. Video  
mode DVD-R/-RW and DVD+R/+RW  
discs can take up to 20 minutes.  
Disc Setup  
Next Screen  
Start  
Basic  
Finalize  
Undo Finalize  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
ENTER  
4
For Video mode and DVD+R/  
+RW discs only, select a title menu style,  
then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or  
‘No’ to cancel.  
The menu you select will be the one that  
appears when the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for  
a DVD+R/+RW) is selected on any DVD  
player.  
Finalize  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 70 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
06  
Recording  
HOME MENU  
Initializing recordable DVD  
discs  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
ENTER  
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
2
Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video  
Mode’, ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Initialize  
DVD+RW’.  
DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either  
Video mode recording or VR mode  
recording.  
1
Disc Setup  
When you first load a blank DVD-RW or  
DVD+RW disc, the recorder initializes it for  
recording automatically. By default, blank  
DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode  
recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init. on  
page 140 if you want to change the default to  
Video mode.  
Start  
Start  
Start  
Basic  
VR Mode  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Video Mode  
Initialize DVD+RW  
Optimize HDD  
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode  
recordings out of the box; if you want to use  
a DVD-R for VR mode recording, you must  
initialize it before recording anything on the  
disc.  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘Start’.  
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the  
disc (except DVD-RAM discs, which can take  
up to 1 hour).  
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be  
initialized in order to erase the contents of  
the disc.  
Initializing Disc  
Pr 1  
1 min left  
Important  
• Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or  
DVD-RAM disc will erase everything  
recorded on it. Make sure there is  
nothing on the disc that you want to  
keep!  
• You may not be able to re-initialize a  
DVD-RW disc in a different format if it  
was originally initialized on an older DVD  
recorder.  
• Once initialized for VR mode recording,  
you can’t re-initialize a DVD-R back to  
Video mode.  
Note  
1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize  
it for Video mode recording.  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 71 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
07  
Playback  
CPhlaapteyr b7 ack  
Introduction  
Basic playback  
Most of the features described in this  
chapter make use of on-screen displays.  
Navigate these using the cursor buttons and  
ENTER. To go back one level from any  
screen, use the RETURN button.  
A L L  
This section shows you how to use your  
recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD,  
etc.), and for playback of video from the  
HDD.  
Remember also that the button guide at the  
bottom of every screen shows which buttons  
do what.  
Important  
Many of the functions covered in this  
chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Video  
CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/DivX discs  
and CDs, although the exact operation of  
some varies slightly with the kind of disc  
loaded.  
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’  
means any kind of playable or recordable  
DVD. If a function is specific to a  
particular kind of DVD disc, it is  
specified.  
• Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and  
DVD+RW discs don’t allow certain  
playback controls to operate at certain  
points in the disc. This is not a  
malfunction.  
• Many functions are not available when a  
Video CD is playing in PBC mode. Start  
playback from the Disc Navigator screen  
for non-PBC playback (see Using the  
Disc Navigator with playback-only discs  
on page 77).  
HDD/DVD  
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files,  
see The PhotoViewer (DVR-645H-S) on  
page 115 and The PhotoViewer (DVR-  
545H-S) on page 123.  
1
Select the HDD or DVD for  
playback.  
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 3  
below.  
Select DVD for any kind of disc playback.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
2
Load a disc.  
Load a disc with the label side facing up,  
using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if  
you’re loading a double-sided DVD-Video  
disc, load it with the side you want to play  
face down).  
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD,  
please first read the note on page 74.  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 72 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
07  
Playback  
PLAY  
Playing DVD discs  
3
Start playback.  
The table below shows the basic playback  
controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD  
discs.  
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video  
CD, a disc menu may appear when you  
start playback. Use the ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ  
buttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc  
menus, and the number buttons and  
ENTER for Video CD menus.  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
If RESUME is displayed on-  
screen, playback starts from  
the place last stopped.  
• When playing video from the HDD,  
playback will automatically stop after the  
end of a title is reached.  
Press to stop playback.  
STOP  
You can resume playback from  
the same point by pressing  
PLAY. (Press STOP again  
to cancel the resume function.)  
• There may be a slight pause when  
playback switches from the first to the  
second layer of a dual-layer disc.  
PAUSE  
• See the following sections for more  
details on playing specific kinds of discs.  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
playback when paused.  
STOP  
Press to start scanning. Press  
repeatedly to increase the scan-  
ning speed.  
4
5
Press to stop playback.  
When you’ve finished using the  
recorder, eject the disc and switch the  
recorder back into standby.  
PREV  
NEXT  
Press to skip to previous/next  
chapter/title. (During playback  
you can also use the front panel  
CH +/– buttons.)  
DVD+R/DVD+RW only:  
PREV may not always skip  
to the previous title.  
REC MODE  
Except VR mode: During play-  
back, enter a chapter number  
then press ENTER to skip  
directly to that chapter within  
the currently playing title.  
On some discs, you can also  
use the number buttons to  
select numbered items in the  
disc menu.  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
PLAY MODE  
CLEAR  
ENTER  
VR mode only: During playback,  
enter a title number then press  
ENTER.  
All: Press CLEAR to clear a  
number entry and start again.  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 73 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
07  
Playback  
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only:  
(Commercial back/skip) Each  
press skips backward/forward  
progressively up to a maximum  
of ten minutes forward or three  
minutes back.  
Press to stop playback.  
You can resume playback from  
the same point by pressing  
PLAY. (Press STOP again  
to cancel the resume function.)  
STOP  
CM  
BACK  
CM  
SKIP  
PAUSE  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
playback when paused.  
/  
/ꢉ  
While paused, press and hold  
to start slow-motion playback.  
Press repeatedly to change the  
playback speed.  
While paused, press to advance  
a single frame in either direc-  
tion.  
Press to start scanning. Press  
repeatedly to increase the scan-  
ning speed.  
PREV  
NEXT  
Press to skip to previous/next  
chapter/title. (During playback  
you can also use the front panel  
CH +/– buttons.)  
Press to display the menu of a  
DVD-Video disc. (DVD+R/+RW  
discs finalized on this recorder  
will display the Disc Navigator.  
Press MENU to display the disc  
menu.)  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
DISC  
NAVIGATOR  
REC MODE  
During playback, enter a title  
number then press ENTER to  
skip directly to that title.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number  
entry and start again.  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
PLAY MODE  
CLEAR  
Use the cursor buttons to navi-  
gate DVD-Video disc menus;  
press ENTER to select items.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
(Commercial back/skip) Each  
press skips backward/forward  
progressively up to a maximum  
of ten minutes forward or three  
minutes back.  
RETURN  
Press to return to the previous  
level of a DVD-Video disc menu.  
CM  
BACK  
CM  
SKIP  
Playing from the HDD  
/  
/ꢉ  
While paused, press and hold  
to start slow-motion playback.  
Press repeatedly to change the  
playback speed.  
The table below shows the basic playback  
controls when playing video recorded on the  
hard disk (HDD).  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
While paused, press to advance  
a single frame in either direc-  
tion.  
If RESUME is displayed on-  
screen, playback starts from  
the place last stopped. Play-  
back automatically stops after  
the end of a title is reached.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 74 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
07  
Playback  
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs  
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs  
The table below shows the basic playback  
controls for Video CD/Super VCDs.  
The table below shows the basic playback  
1
controls for audio CDs , and WMA/MP3  
files.  
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC  
for short) menus. These discs show PBC in  
the display when you load them and display  
a menu on-screen from where you can select  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
2
what to watch.  
Press to stop playback.  
STOP  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
Video CD only: If RESUME is dis-  
played on-screen, playback  
starts from the place last  
stopped.  
PAUSE  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
playback when paused.  
Except WMA: Press to start  
scanning. Press again to  
increase the scanning speed.  
(There are two scan speeds; the  
current scan speed is shown  
on-screen.)  
Press to stop playback.  
STOP  
Video CD only: You can resume  
playback from the same point  
by pressing PLAY. (Press  
STOP again to cancel the  
resume function.)  
PREV  
NEXT  
Press to skip to previous/next  
track (or folder for WMA/MP3  
disc). (During playback you can  
also use the front panel CH +/–  
buttons.)  
PAUSE  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
playback when paused.  
Press to start scanning. Press  
repeatedly to increase the scan-  
ning speed.  
REC MODE  
During playback, enter a track  
number then press ENTER to  
skip directly to that track.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number  
entry and start again.  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
PREV  
NEXT  
Press to skip to previous/next  
track.  
PLAY MODE  
CLEAR  
When a PBC menu is dis-  
played, press to display the pre-  
vious/next page. (During  
playback you can also use the  
front panel CH +/– buttons.)  
ENTER  
Note  
1 If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with  
a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected  
using the AUDIO (SHIFT + 4) button (see Switching audio channels on page 82).  
2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not avail-  
able. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator  
(see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 77).  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 75 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
07  
Playback  
Playing DivX video files  
The table below shows the basic playback  
controls for DivX video files.  
REC MODE  
During playback, enter a track  
number then press ENTER to  
skip directly to that track.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number  
entry and start again.  
While a PBC menu screen is  
displayed, use to select num-  
bered menu items.  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
PLAY MODE  
CLEAR  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
If RESUME is displayed on-  
screen, playback starts from  
the place last stopped. Play-  
back of titles (DivX files) pro-  
ceeds in alphabetical order.  
ENTER  
Video CD only: Each press skips  
backward/forwardprogressively  
up to a maximum of ten min-  
utes forward or three minutes  
back. Note that this function  
doesn’t work when playing in  
PBC mode.  
CM  
BACK  
CM  
SKIP  
Press to stop playback.  
STOP  
You can resume playback from  
the same point by pressing  
PLAY. (Press STOP again  
to cancel the resume function.)  
PAUSE  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
/ꢉ  
While paused, press and hold  
to start slow-motion playback.  
Press repeatedly to change the  
playback speed (forward only).  
While paused, press to advance  
a single frame (forward only).  
playback when paused.  
Press to start scanning. Press  
repeatedly to increase the scan-  
ning speed.  
PREV  
NEXT  
Press to skip to previous/next  
title. (During playback you can  
also use the front panel CH +/–  
buttons.)  
RETURN  
Press to display the disc menu  
of a Video CD/Super VCD play-  
ing in PBC mode.  
/ꢉ  
While paused, press to advance  
one frame. Press and hold to  
start slow motion playback  
(press repeatedly to change the  
slow motion play speed).  
SHIFT  
AUDIO  
Press to display the playback  
audio type; press repeatedly to  
change the playback audio  
type.  
+
SHIFT  
SUBTITLE  
Press to display subtitle  
information; press repeatedly to  
change subtitles.  
+
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 76 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
07  
Playback  
• For HDD recordings, you should be able  
to see a thumbnail title digest. If it  
doesn’t display, set Set Preview to  
Normal. See Set Preview on page 144.  
Using the Disc Navigator to  
browse the contents of a disc  
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the  
contents of a disc and start playback.  
ENTER  
4
Play the highlighted title.  
• You can also select Play from the  
command menu options.  
Using the Disc Navigator with  
recordable discs and the HDD  
Changing the display style of the  
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
Disc Navigator  
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse  
and edit video on recordable DVDs and the  
HDD, and to view information on titles.  
You can choose to display titles in the Disc  
Navigator in various different ways, sorted  
alphabetically, by recording date, by genre,  
and so on. You can also choose whether to  
display four or eight titles on the screen at  
the same time.  
See also Editing on page 88 for more on  
editing recordable discs.  
HDD/DVD  
1
2
Select the HDD or DVD.  
Open the Disc Navigator.  
1
Display the View Options  
DISC  
NAVIGATOR  
panel.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
The View Options panel  
10Titles  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles  
9
8
7
23:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Style  
4
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
9
SP  
Titles  
Recent first  
All Genres  
MENU  
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)  
Sort order  
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
9
SP  
7
SP  
Recent first  
MENU  
2h00m(1.0G)  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Genre  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
HDD  
SP  
All Genres  
7
SP  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
• You can also access the Disc Navigator  
from the Home Menu.  
ENTER  
2
Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or  
3
Browse the list of titles.  
• Use the PREV/ꢐ NEXT buttons to  
display the previous/next page of titles.  
‘Genre’, then press ENTER to see the  
available view options.  
Style – Select four or eight titles per  
screen view  
• To change the thumbnail picture  
displayed for a title see Set Thumbnail on  
page 93.  
Sort order – Sort by date (most recent  
first), unwatched first, title name or  
recording date (oldest first)  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 77 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
07  
Playback  
Genre – Display all genres or just a  
selected genre  
The screen below shows a WMA/MP3/DivX  
disc. Navigate to the folder, or the track/title  
within a folder that you want to play.  
ENTER  
Disc Navigator  
3
Choose a view option, then  
Folder (01-03)  
01.Rock  
02.Pop  
Track(001-004)  
001.Intro  
002.Escape  
003.Everything You Say  
004.What I Do  
CD  
WMA/MP3  
Divx  
press ENTER.  
The title list display is updated according to  
03.Dance  
the new display preferences.  
Using the Disc Navigator with  
playback-only discs  
Playback starts after you press ENTER.  
• For discs that contain CD-Audio tracks  
and WMA/MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you  
can switch the playback area between  
CD, WMA/MP3 and DivX. This can only  
be done while the disc is stopped.  
WMA/MP3  
DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD  
DivX  
HOME MENU  
1
Display the Home Menu.  
Scanning discs  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Disc Navigator’.  
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD  
or WMA/MP3/DivX disc, you can press DISC  
NAVIGATOR, which takes you straight to  
the Disc Navigator screen.  
A L L  
(except WMA)  
You can scan discs at various speeds,  
forwards or backwards.  
1
1
During playback, start reverse  
ENTER  
or forward scanning.  
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.  
3
Select what you want to play.  
Depending on the type of disc you have  
loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly  
different, but they are all navigated in the  
same way.  
Note  
1 • Only analog audio is output when scanning audio CDs.  
• No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles.  
• Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs and DivX titles with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM  
sound on forward SCAN 1 (Linear PCM is output from the coaxial digital output, except during chase playback  
and simultaneous recording/playback). No sound is output when using other scan speeds.  
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, except on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output from the  
coaxial digital output during forward SCAN 1).  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD  
disc.  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 78 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
07  
Playback  
Frame advance/frame  
reverse  
2
Press repeatedly to change the  
scanning speed.  
There are four scanning speeds available  
when playing HDD video, a DVD or a DivX  
title. Reverse playback is also possible with  
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX  
1
HDD and DVD video.  
You can advance or back up video on a DVD  
There are two scanning speeds for other  
types of disc.  
2
disc or the HDD frame-by-frame.  
With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles,  
you can only use frame advance.  
PLAY  
3
Resume normal playback.  
PAUSE  
1
Pause playback.  
/  
/ꢉ  
Playing in slow motion  
2
Back up or advance one  
frame with each press.  
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX  
PLAY  
3
Resume normal playback.  
You can play video at various slow motion  
speeds. DVDs and video on the HDD can be  
played in slow motion in either direction,  
while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles  
can only be played forwards in slow motion.  
The Play Mode menu  
There is no sound when playing in slow  
motion.  
A L L  
The Play Mode menu gives you access to  
search functions, repeat and program play  
functions.  
PAUSE  
1
Pause playback.  
/  
/ꢉ  
2
Press and hold to start slow  
SHIFT  
PLAY MODE  
Press  
+
to display the Play  
motion reverse or forward play.  
Mode menu.  
/  
/ꢉ  
3
Press repeatedly to change  
Play Mode  
the slow motion speed.  
The current playback speed is indicated on-  
screen.  
Time Search  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Program  
PLAY  
4
Resume normal playback.  
Note  
1 Reverse playback may not be smooth.  
2 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached.  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 79 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
07  
Playback  
• You can also access the Play Mode  
menu from the Home Menu (press  
HOME MENU).  
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2  
minutes and 30 seconds into the current  
track, press 2, 3, 0.  
• To exit the Play Mode menu, press  
HOME MENU or PLAY MODE (SHIFT +  
9).  
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For  
example, for track 6, press 6.  
ENTER  
3
Start playback.  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
A L L  
DVD HDD CD Video CD DivX  
The Search Mode feature lets you start  
playback from a specified point in a disc by  
time or by title/chapter/folder/track  
number.  
The A-B Repeat function allows you to  
specify two points (A and B) within a track or  
title that form a loop which is played over  
1
2
and over.  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Search Mode’ from  
ENTER  
the Play Mode menu, then choose a  
search option.  
The available search options depend on the  
1
During playback, select ‘A-B  
Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.  
type of disc.  
ENTER  
2
With ‘A (Loop Start)’  
REC MODE  
highlighted, press at the point you want  
the loop to start.  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
PLAY MODE  
2
Enter a title/chapter/folder/  
Play Mode  
track number or a search time.  
A (Loop Start)  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
B (Loop End)  
Off  
Program  
Play Mode  
Time Search  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Input Time  
0.01.00  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Program  
ENTER  
3
With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted,  
press at the point you want the loop to  
end.  
Playback immediately jumps back to the  
start point and plays the loop round and  
round.  
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25  
minutes into the current title, press 2, 5, 0,  
0. For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds  
into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.  
Note  
1 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.  
2 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is canceled.  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 80 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
07  
Playback  
• When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode  
DVD, or from the HDD, the start and end  
points of the loop must be in the same  
title.  
Program play  
HDD DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD  
WMA/MP3  
• To resume normal playback, select Off  
from the A-B Repeat menu, or press  
CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play  
Mode menu) is displayed.  
This feature lets you program the play order  
2
of titles/chapters /folders/tracks on a disc or  
the HDD.  
Repeat play  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Program’ from the Play  
A L L  
Mode menu, then ‘Input/Edit Program’.  
The Input/Edit Program screen varies  
according to the disc type. Below is the DVD  
input screen.  
There are various repeat play options,  
depending on the kind of disc loaded, or if  
you’re using the HDD for playback. It’s also  
possible to use repeat play together with  
program play to repeat the tracks/chapters  
in the program list (see Program play  
Program  
Step  
01.001  
02.  
03.  
04.  
05.  
06.  
07.  
08.  
Title (01-03)  
Title 01  
Title 02  
Chapter(001-015)  
Chapter 001  
Chapter 002  
Chapter 003  
Chapter 004  
Chapter 005  
Chapter 006  
Chapter 007  
Chapter 008  
1
below).  
Title 03  
ENTER  
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play  
Mode menu, then choose a repeat play  
mode.  
ENTER  
Play Mode  
2
Select a title, chapter, folder  
Repeat Disc  
Repeat Title  
Repeat Chapter  
Repeat Off  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
or track for the current step in the  
program list.  
Program  
After pressing ENTER to add the title/  
chapter/folder/track, the step number  
automatically moves down one.  
• To resume normal playback, select  
Repeat Off from the Repeat Play menu,  
or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as  
the Play Mode menu) is displayed.  
• To insert a step into the program list,  
highlight the step number where you  
want to insert another step, then select a  
chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After  
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent  
steps move down one.  
Note  
1 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.  
2 When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be some-  
times be played, depending on the disc.  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 81 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
07  
Playback  
• To delete a step from the program list,  
highlight the step you want to delete,  
then press CLEAR.  
Displaying and switching  
subtitles  
3
list.  
Repeat step 2 to build up a program  
DVD-Video DivX  
A program list can contain up to 24 titles/  
chapters/folders/tracks.  
Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in  
one or more languages; the disc box will  
usually tell you which subtitle languages are  
available. You can switch subtitle language  
PLAY  
4
Play the program list.  
1
Program play remains active until you  
cancel program play, erase the program list,  
eject the disc or switch off the recorder.  
during playback.  
Check the disc packaging for details of the  
subtitle options.  
SHIFT  
SUBTITLE  
+
Select/change the subtitle  
Tip  
language.  
The current subtitle language is shown on-  
screen and in the front panel display.  
• To save your program list and exit the  
program edit screen without starting  
playback, press HOME MENU or PLAY  
MODE (SHIFT + 9).  
• To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE  
(SHIFT + 5) then CLEAR.  
• During program play, press NEXT to  
skip to the next program step.  
• To repeat play the program list, select  
Program Repeat from the Repeat Play  
Mode menu (see Repeat play on  
page 80).  
• Press CLEAR during playback to switch  
off program play (if no menu OSD, such  
as the Disc Navigator, is displayed).  
Press while stopped to erase the  
program list.  
• From the Program menu you can also:  
Start Program Play – Starts playback of  
a saved program list  
Cancel Program Play – Turns off  
program play, but does not erase the  
program list  
Erase Program List – Erases the  
program list and turns off program play  
Note  
1 • Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to  
access.  
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 138.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 82 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
07  
Playback  
Switching DVD and DivX  
soundtracks  
Switching audio channels  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD CD Video CD Super VCD  
WMA/MP3  
DVD-Video DivX  
When playing a DVD disc or DivX title  
recorded with two or more soundtracks  
(often in different languages), you can  
2
For HDD and VR mode content recorded  
with bilingual audio, you can switch between  
left (L) channel, right (R) channel, or both  
1
switch the soundtrack during playback.  
3
(L+R).  
Check the disc packaging for details of the  
soundtrack options.  
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you  
can switch between stereo, just the left  
channel or just the right channel.  
SHIFT  
AUDIO  
+
Change the audio  
Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks.  
With these discs you can switch between the  
two soundtracks as well as individual  
channels in each.  
soundtrack.  
The current audio language is shown on-  
screen and in the front panel display.  
• The sound may drop out for a few  
seconds when switching soundtracks.  
SHIFT  
AUDIO  
+
Press repeatedly to display/  
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital  
and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog  
audio output when DTS is selected. To  
listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect  
this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV  
amp/receiver with built-in DTS decoder  
via the digital output. See Connecting to  
an AV amplifier/receiver on page 22 for  
connection details.  
switch the audio channel.  
The audio channel(s) currently playing are  
indicated on-screen.  
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
L+R – Both channels (default)  
L – Left channel only  
R – Right channel only  
WMA/MP3  
CD Video CD  
Stereo – Stereo (default)  
1/L – Left channel only  
2/R – Right channel only  
Note  
1 • Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to ac-  
cess.  
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 138.  
2 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 140).  
3 When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via  
the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital PCM (see  
Dolby Digital Out on page 137) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel.  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 83 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
07  
Playback  
Displaying disc information  
Super VCD  
on-screen  
1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1 / Stereo  
(default)  
1 L – Soundtrack 1 / Left channel  
1 R – Soundtrack 1 / Right channel  
2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2 / Stereo  
2 L – Soundtrack 2 / Left channel  
2 R – Soundtrack 2 / Right channel  
You can display various on-screen  
information about the disc loaded or the  
HDD.  
DISPLAY  
Display/change the on-screen  
information.  
• Press once to show the HDD and  
removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity  
together. Press again to show the status  
of just the currently selected playback/  
recording device (HDD or removable  
disc).  
Switching camera angles  
DVD-Video  
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot  
from two or more angles—check the disc  
box for details: it should be marked with a  
• To hide the information display, press  
DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears.  
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.  
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the  
same icon appears on screen to let you know  
that other angles are available (this can be  
switched off if you prefer—see Angle  
Indicator on page 142).  
HDD and removable disc activity  
display  
Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and  
removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the  
HDD/DVD button to switch between the two  
kinds of display.  
SHIFT  
ANGLE  
+
Switch the camera angle.  
• The angle number is displayed on-  
screen.  
• If the disc was paused, playback starts  
again with the new angle.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 84 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
07  
Playback  
The example displays below show high-  
speed copying from HDD to DVD, and HDD  
chase playback.  
Tip  
• See Switching camera angles on page 83  
for more on multi-angle scene  
switching.  
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)  
HDD  
Hi-Speed Copy  
DVD-RW Video  
• When using the simultaneous play and  
record feature, the display shows  
information for playback only.  
HDD DVD  
Remain 10h35m  
Stop  
Remain –h––m  
Stop  
0h08m left  
• During real-time copy, the copy source  
playback information is displayed.  
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)  
• The Video mode disc displays become  
the same as a DVD-Video disc once the  
disc is finalized.  
HDD  
DVD-RW Video  
Remain 10h35m  
Chase Play  
Rec  
Remain 0h52m  
Stop  
• The total recording time figure shown in  
parenthesis is calculated based on a  
12 cm / 4.7 GB disc at the displayed  
record setting.  
Recording time  
• Recording and playback times for TV  
recordings are approximately 0.1 %  
shorter than the actual time. This is  
because of the slightly different frame  
rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD.  
Relative playback position  
Shows recording restrictions for  
the current channel program  
• The frame number is shown next to the  
elapsed time display when the disc is  
paused.  
Stop  
DVD-RW VR  
Original  
ABC Pr 1  
Stereo  
Copy Once  
Resume  
XP (1h00m/DVD)  
Finalized  
Rem. 0h35m  
Copy Once or Can’t Record messages  
may appear in the stop or recording  
displays. These indicate that the  
broadcast TV program contains copy  
control information.  
Disc Name  
:
Comedy shows  
DVD Mode  
Indicates copy-protected material  
Indicates a multi-angle scene  
Play  
3–2  
0. 00. 15  
!
DVD-R Video Chapter Time 0. 00. 21  
Chapter Total 0h01m52s  
ꢈꢈꢈꢈꢈꢈꢈ  
4.32Mbps  
Title Name  
:
21/11 Football match  
Indicates the data transfer rate  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 85 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
08  
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder (DVR-645H-S)  
CPhlaapteyr i8ng and recording from a  
DV camcorder  
(DVR-645H-S)  
You can play back and record video from a  
DV camcorder connected to the DV IN jack  
on the front panel of this recorder.  
• To record the incoming video, press  
HDD/DVD to select the HDD or a DVD  
for recording, then press REC. Press  
STOP REC to finish recording.  
If there is no signal from the device  
connected to the DV jack, or the signal is  
copy-protected, recording will pause. It  
will automatically restart once there is a  
recordable signal.  
Important  
• If you connect a second recorder using a  
DV cable, you cannot control the second  
unit from this one.  
• The recorder will only start recording  
from the DV IN jack if there is a valid  
signal. Recording will pause if the signal  
is interrupted during recording.  
• You can’t control this unit remotely from  
a component connected to the DV IN  
jack.  
• If your source is copy-protected using  
Copy Guard, you will not be able to  
record it. See Restrictions on video  
recording on page 57 for more details.  
Playing from a DV camcorder  
1
Make sure your DV camcorder is  
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.  
Recording from a DV  
camcorder  
2
From the Initial Settings menu, check  
that the DV audio input is setup as you  
require.  
See DV Input on page 136 for more on this.  
Using the recorder’s remote, you can control  
both the camcorder and this recorder.  
• Check also that the Audio In settings for  
External Audio and Bilingual  
Recording are as you want them (see  
Audio In on page 136).  
Important  
• The source signal must be DVC-SD  
format.  
HOME MENU  
3
Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video  
Playback’ from the Home Menu.  
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled  
using this recorder’s remote.  
4
Start playback on the camcorder.  
• You can’t record date and time  
information from DV cassette.  
Images from the camcorder should appear  
on your TV.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 86 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
08  
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder (DVR-645H-S)  
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape  
is blank, or has copy-protected material  
ENTER  
on it, this recorder will pause recording.  
Recording will restart automatically  
when there is a recordable signal.  
However, if there is more than 10  
seconds of blank tape, this recorder will  
stop recording and the camcorder  
should stop (depending on the  
camcorder).  
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk  
Drive’ or ‘Record to DVD’.  
6
Find the place on the camcorder tape  
that you want to start recording from.  
For best results, pause playback at the point  
from which you want to record.  
• Depending on your camcorder, you can  
use this recorder’s remote to control the  
camcorder using the , , , ,  
, and buttons.  
• For best results when recording from a  
DV camcorder to this recorder, we  
recommend cueing the camcorder to  
the place you want to start recording  
from and setting the camcorder to play-  
pause.  
ENTER  
7
Select ‘Start Rec’.  
1
Make sure your DV camcorder is  
Stop  
1.02.22  
Stop  
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.  
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.  
Control with these  
Start Rec  
Pause Rec  
Stop Rec  
buttons  
REC MODE  
SHIFT  
HDD  
Rem.  
SP (2h00m/DVD)  
32h45m  
+
2
Set the recording quality.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording  
time on page 59 for detailed information.  
• You can pause or stop the recording by  
selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from  
the on-screen display. You cannot  
control the camcorder from this remote  
control during recording.  
3
From the Initial Settings menu, check  
that the DV audio input is setup as you  
require.  
See DV Input on page 136 for more on this.  
• Check also that the Audio In settings for  
External Audio and Bilingual  
Recording are as you want them (see  
Audio In on page 136).  
• If you restart recording after stopping the  
camcorder, the first few seconds of the  
camcorder tape will not be recorded.  
Use the pause button on your camcorder  
instead and recording will start  
immediately.  
HOME MENU  
4
Select ‘DV’, then ‘Copy from a  
HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only:  
A chapter marker is inserted every time  
there is a break in the timecode on the  
DV tape. This happens when the  
recording is stopped or paused then  
restarted, for example.  
DV Source’ from the Home Menu.  
• DV recording only works when the DV  
camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape  
loaded.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 87 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
08  
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder (DVR-645H-S)  
• If you don’t want to see the DV recording  
screen during recording, press DISPLAY  
About DV  
to hide it (press again to display).  
Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394-  
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV  
recording screen using the HOME  
MENU or RETURN button.  
1995, you can connect a DV camcorder to  
this recorder using a DV cable for input of  
audio, video, data and control signals.  
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are  
trademarks.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-  
format (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital  
satellite receivers and Digital VHS video  
recorders are not compatible.  
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with  
the recorder!  
Check that the DV cable is properly  
connected. Also make sure that what  
you’re trying to record is not copy-  
protected.  
• You cannot connect more than one DV  
camcorder at a time to this recorder.  
• You cannot control this recorder from  
external equipment connected via the  
DV IN jack.  
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off  
the camcorder then switch back on.  
• It may not always be possible to control  
the connected camcorder via the DV IN  
jack.  
• There’s a picture, but no sound!  
Try switching the DV Input setting (see  
DV Input on page 136) between Stereo 1  
• DV camcorders can usually record audio  
as stereo 16-bit / 48 kHz, or twin stereo  
tracks of 12-bit / 32 kHz. This recorder  
can only record one stereo audio track.  
Set the DV Input setting as required  
(see DV Input on page 136).  
1
and Stereo 2.  
DV video setting  
• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be  
32 kHz or 48 kHz (not 44.1 kHz).  
Use this setting to adjust the picture quality  
of the incoming video from the DV device  
connected to the DV jack of this recorder.  
• Picture disturbance in the recording  
may occur if the source component  
pauses playback or plays an unrecorded  
section of tape, or if the power fails in the  
source component, or the DV cable is  
disconnected.  
HOME MENU  
Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video  
Setting’ from the Home Menu.  
For detailed information on this setting,  
see Setting the picture quality for TV and  
external inputs on page 128.  
• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is  
no output functionality.  
Note  
1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You  
can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting (page 136).  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 88 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
09  
Editing  
CEhdapitetri9ng  
Editing options  
The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types.  
DVD-R/-RW  
(Video mode),  
DVD+R/+RW  
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM  
HDD  
(VR mode)  
Original  
Play List  
Create (page 90)  
Play (page 90)  
Erase (page 91)  
Edit > Title Name (page 91)  
Edit > Set Thumbnail  
(page 93)  
Edit > Erase Section  
(page 93)  
Edit > Divide (page 94)  
Edit > Chapter Edit  
(page 95)  
Edit > Set Genre (page 96)  
Edit > Lock (page 97)  
Edit > Move (page 97)  
Edit > Combine (page 98)  
Genre Name (page 98)  
Multi-Mode (page 99)  
Undo (page 100)  
*1  
*1  
*1 DVD-R/-RW only  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 89 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
09  
Editing  
The Disc Navigator screen  
Press to display the command  
menu panel. Use the ꢁ/ꢂ and ENTER  
buttons to navigate the menus.  
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can  
edit video content on unfinalized Video mode  
and VR mode DVD-R/-RW discs, DVD+R/  
+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as video  
content on the internal hard disk drive.  
PREV  
NEXT  
When in the title list, press to  
display the previous/next page if there  
are more titles than can be displayed.  
Important  
DISPLAY  
• Titles that have been recorded with a  
Input Line System setting different to the  
current setting of the recorder are shown  
in the Disc Navigator with a blank  
thumbnail image. See also Additional  
information about the TV system settings  
on page 144.  
Press to change the title  
information displayed in the title list.  
HDD/DVD  
Press to switch between the HDD  
and DVD Disc Navigator screens.  
• If you are editing a VR mode DVD-R/-RW  
or DVD-RAM disc you can display the  
Play List by selecting Play List from the  
view options panel (press , then select  
Play List from the view options, then  
Play List).  
• During recording, if you display the Disc  
Navigator for the HDD, some of the titles  
may appear with a  
mark. These titles  
were recorded with a Input Line System  
setting different to the current setting of  
the recorder. During recording, these  
titles cannot be played.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Style  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
4
Titles  
2h00m(1.0G)
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
PlayList  
9
SP  
HDD/DVD  
Original  
MENU  
2h00m(1.0G)  
1
2
Select the HDD or DVD.  
• Titles on the HDD marked with a  
icon are recently recorded titles that  
haven’t yet been played.  
DISC  
NAVIGATOR  
Display the Disc Navigator  
screen.  
Playback will automatically stop when you  
do this.  
DISC  
NAVIGATOR  
3
Press to exit the Disc Navigator.  
• The Disc Navigator is also accessible  
from the Home Menu.  
View options panel  
Title list  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
h00m(1.0G)
Selected  
title  
2
4
Titles  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Recent first  
All Genres  
MENU  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
HDD  
SP  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
Available  
recording time  
Title thumbnail Title information Command  
menu panel  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 90 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
09  
Editing  
Editing accuracy  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
0Titles  
Some editing commands ask you whether  
you want to keep Video mode compatibility  
or frame accuracy (Video Mode Compatible  
Editing or Frame Accurate Editing).  
Play  
No title  
Erase  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
Play List  
Create  
Frame accurate editing is very precise. The  
edit point is accurate to the exact frame you  
choose. However, this accuracy is not  
preserved in any copy you make if you use  
the high-speed copy function to make a  
Video mode DVD.  
Undo  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
ENTER  
Video mode compatible editing is less  
precise. The edit point you choose will only  
be accurate to within 0.5 to 1 second. On the  
other hand, these edit points will be  
preserved if you use high-speed copy to  
make a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW.  
2
Select an original title to add  
to the Play List.  
Repeat these two steps to add as many titles  
as necessary to the Play List.  
Play  
HDD genres  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
The large capacity of the HDD means that  
there may be many hours of video in the  
recorder. To help you organize your HDD  
video content you can assign different  
genres to titles. There are 14 genres in total,  
including ten user-definable ones that you  
can name as you like.  
HDD  
Use this function to start playback of a title.  
1
Highlight the title you want  
to play.  
Create  
ENTER  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
Play List only  
2
Select ‘Play’ from the  
command menu panel.  
Playback of the title you selected starts.  
Use this function to create a Play List and  
add titles to it.  
Before you can use this command, make  
sure that the Play List is switched on in the  
view options panel on the left.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Play  
SP  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
Erase  
2
4
Titles  
Edit  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
S
ENTER  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Genre Name  
1
Select ‘Create’ from the  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
S
command menu panel.  
M
u
lti-Mode  
19:00 MON 29/11  
HDD  
SP  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 91 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
09  
Editing  
Erase  
Title Name  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
HDD  
HDD  
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.  
You can give titles new names of up to 64  
characters long for VR mode, DVD-RAM and  
HDD recordings, and up to 40 characters for  
Video mode recordings and DVD+R/+RW  
discs.  
When you erase titles from the HDD or  
Original titles from a VR mode DVD-RW, the  
available recording space increases  
accordingly. Erasing a title from a Video  
mode DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc increases  
the available recording time only if it is the  
1
1
Highlight the title you want  
last title on the disc.  
to name (or rename).  
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a  
DVD-R (VR mode or Video mode) or DVD+R,  
will not result in any more free space on the  
disc.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’  
from the command menu panel.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
1
Highlight the title you want  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12
to erase.  
Set Thumbnail  
Title name  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00  
Divide  
Fri 3/12
Chapter Edit  
ENTER  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
2
Select ‘Erase’ from the  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00  
Lock
Thu 2/12
command menu panel.  
Cancel  
19:00 MON 29/11  
HDD  
SP  
19:00  
Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
Tip  
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing  
CLEAR when the title is highlighted.  
Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER.  
Note  
1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 92 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
09  
Editing  
Using the remote key shortcuts to  
input a name  
The table below shows the remote control  
key shortcuts that you can use to input  
characters in the name input screen.  
Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through  
the characters shown.  
ENTER  
3
title.  
Input a name for the selected  
Input Title Name  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP  
A B C D E  
F
G H  
I
J
K L M  
.
(
I
,
)
I
ß
_
}
˚
`
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
N
A
D
0
O
A
N
1
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R
A
O
4
S T U V WX Y Z  
ç
If you want to enter two characters in  
succession that are both on the same button  
(for example a P and an R), press to  
advance the cursor one space manually  
between inputting the two characters.  
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
ˆ
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
$
&
~
+
/
@
¥
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
©
¬
/2  
®
/4  
< < 14  
/
o
1
3
2
3
1
¿
´
OK  
Clear  
Space  
• A name generated automatically by the  
recorder will already be in the name  
input section of the screen. Use the ꢋ/  
buttons to change the cursor  
position.  
Key  
1
Characters  
Key  
6
Characters  
. , ’ ? ! – & 1  
m n o 6 ö ô ò ó  
ø ñ  
a b c 2 ä à á â ã  
æ ç  
p q r s 7 $  
2
7
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper  
or lower-case, or use the CASE  
SELECTION buttons (PREV/ꢐ  
NEXT).  
*1  
ÿ/ß  
d e f 3 è é ë ê  
g h i 4 î ï ì í ¡  
j k l 5 £  
t u v 8 ü ù û ú  
w x y z 9  
3
4
8
9
• You can also use the CLEAR button to  
delete characters directly (press and  
hold for two seconds to delete the whole  
name). For other remote control key  
shortcuts, see Using the remote key  
shortcuts to input a name below.  
0
5
0
[cursor back]  
[cursor forward]  
ꢏ/ [change case] CLEAR [clear character]  
• For discs formatted on a different DVD  
recorder, you will see only a limited  
character set.  
<space>  
[finish name  
input]  
~
SHIFT  
( ) _ / : ; ” ` ^ @ # % ¥ | + =  
ENTER  
{ } [ ] < >  
4
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name  
*1  
and return to the main Disc Navigator  
screen.  
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß  
• To return to the main Disc Navigator  
screen without saving changes to the  
title name, press RETURN.  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 93 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
09  
Editing  
You can also use the chapter and time  
search features (press PLAY MODE (SHIFT  
Set Thumbnail  
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW  
+ 9)), and the  
CM SKIP and  
CM  
BACK buttons.  
DVD-RAM  
You can change the thumbnail picture that  
appears in the Disc Navigator for a title to  
any frame that appears in that title.  
4
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the  
Edit screen.  
Erase Section  
1
Highlight the title you want  
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
to change the thumbnail picture for.  
Using this command you can delete a part of  
a title, ideal for cutting out the commercial  
breaks in a recording made from the TV.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’  
from the command menu panel.  
The thumbnail setting screen appears from  
which you can find the frame you want.  
1
Highlight the title containing  
the section you want to erase.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 P
Title name  
ENTER  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
8
7
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’  
20:00 FRI 3/12  
Divide  
20:00  
Fri 3/12
Chapter Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
from the command menu panel.  
Set Genre  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00  
Lock
Thu 2/12
Cancel
ENTER  
19:00 MON 29/11  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
19:00  
Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
3
edit.  
HDD only: Select the type of  
1h00m(1.0G)  
3
Use the playback controls (, , ,  
DVD RECORDER  
!
, etc.) to find a suitable frame, then  
press ENTER to set.  
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
Set Thumbnail (HDD)  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP  
2h00m  
Rec. time  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
10-1 00.00.09.15  
Play Pause  
• For more information about these  
OK  
Exit  
options, see Editing accuracy on page 90.  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 94 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
09  
Editing  
4
Highlight ‘From’ then use the  
Divide  
playback controls (, , , , etc.) to  
find the start of the section to erase, then  
press ENTER.  
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates  
the current play position in the title. After  
pressing ENTER, a marker shows the start of  
the section.  
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
Play List only  
Use this command to divide a title into two.  
Note that once divided, the two new HDD  
titles cannot be recombined into one again.  
1
Highlight the title you want  
Erase Section (HDD)  
to divide.  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP  
2h00m  
Rec. time  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from  
10-1 00.00.09.15  
Play Pause  
the command menu panel.  
From  
To  
Exit  
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.  
DVD RECORDER  
!
ENTER  
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the  
same way, find the end of the section to  
erase, then press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, another marker  
indicates the end of the section, with the  
section itself marked in red.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
• For more information about these  
ENTER  
options, see Editing accuracy on page 90.  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’  
4
Use the playback controls (, , ,  
to cancel.  
, etc.) to find the place you want to  
divide the title.  
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few  
seconds of video either side of the marked  
section to see how the edit will look.  
Divide Title (HDD)  
• When editing VR mode Original content,  
you may not be able to erase very short  
sections (less than five seconds).  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP  
2h00m  
Rec. time  
101 00.00.09.15  
Play Pause  
Divide  
Cancel  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 95 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
09  
Editing  
• For more information about these  
options, see Editing accuracy on page 90.  
ENTER  
5
Press to divide the title at the  
current playback position.  
4
Select the command you want:  
Divide – Divide a chapter into two or  
more parts: Use the playback controls  
(, , , , etc.) to find the point at  
which you want to divide the chapter,  
then press ENTER.  
ENTER  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
Divided titles cannot  
be combined.  
OK?  
!
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
Yes  
No  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
Rec. time  
Chapters  
1h00m  
5
11  
Play  
0.00.00  
Chapter Edit  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD  
You can keep dividing the chapter as  
many times as you wish (up to 999  
chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM disc or  
99 chapters per HDD title).  
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on  
the HDD you can edit individual chapters  
within a title, with commands for erasing,  
combining and dividing.  
1
2
Erase /Move – Erase or move  
chapters: Select the chapter you want to  
erase/move and press ENTER. Select  
whether you want to erase or move the  
chapter.  
1
Highlight the title that contains the  
chapters you want to edit.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’  
Move command only: Select the  
destination for the chapter, and press  
ENTER.  
from the command menu panel.  
ENTER  
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
3
HDD only: Select the type of  
19:00 Mon 29/11 P
Erase  
Rec. time  
Chapter  
1
Move  
edit.  
0
Cancel  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
DVD RECORDER  
!
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
Note  
1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.  
2 VR mode Play List only.  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 96 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
09  
Editing  
1
Set Genre  
Combine – Combine two adjacent  
chapters into one: Highlight the bar  
divider between two adjacent chapters  
and press ENTER.  
HDD  
Use this command to assign a genre to a  
title.  
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
Rec. time  
1h00m  
1
2
3
4
5
1
Highlight the title you want  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
to assign a genre to.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from  
ENTER  
the command menu panel.  
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the  
main Disc Navigator screen.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 P
Title name  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
Divide  
20:00  
Fri 3/12
Chapter Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00  
Lock  
Thu 2/12
Cancel
19:00 MON 29/11  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
19:00  
Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
ENTER  
3
Select a genre for the title.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12
No Category  
4
Titles  
Movies  
9
20:00 FRI 3/12  
Sport  
20:00  
Fri 3/12
Children  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Other  
Free1  
8
7
22:00 THU 2/12  
Free2  
22:00  
Thu 2/12
19:00 MON 29/11  
HDD  
SP  
19:00  
Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
Note  
1 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been  
divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into  
one.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 97 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
09  
Editing  
Lock  
Move  
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
Play List only  
Use this function to re-arrange the playing  
order of Play List titles.  
DVD-RAM  
Original only  
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited  
or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it,  
you can always unlock it later.  
1
Highlight the title you want  
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the  
to move.  
ENTER  
Important  
2
• You can’t undo any edits made before  
changing the lock status. You also can’t  
undo a lock/unlock command using the  
Undo option from the Disc Navigator  
menu.  
command menu panel.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
1
2
3
4
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29Mon 7:00PM
Title name  
Se  
EraseSection  
Divide  
t
T
humbnail
4
Titles  
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2Thu 10:00PM 
1
Highlight the title you want to lock  
Chapter Edit  
Play List  
(or unlock).  
Move  
Combine  
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3Fri 8:00PM 9
Cancel  
ENTER  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3Fri 11:00PM 9ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
DVD  
VR Mode  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the  
Remain  
0h30m  
command menu panel.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
ENTER  
10Titles  
10  
3
title.  
Select a new position for the  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 P
Title name  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
20:00 FRI 3/12  
Divide  
20:00  
Fri 3/12
Chapter Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Title to move  
Set Genre  
8
7
22:00 THU 2/12  
Lock  
22:00  
Thu 2/12
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
Cancel
1
23:00 FRI 3/12  
19:00 MON 29/11  
HDD  
SP  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)
19:00  
Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
4
Titles  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
2
3
4
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
SP  
Play List  
MENU  
2h00m(1.0G)  
An unlocked title will become locked; a  
locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles  
are shown in the Disc Navigator with a  
padlock icon.  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Insert position  
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play  
List is displayed.  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 98 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
09  
Editing  
Combine  
ENTER  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
Play List only  
to cancel.  
Use this function to combine two Play List  
titles into one.  
OK to combine titles  
1 and 3 ?  
!
Yes  
No  
1
Highlight the title you want  
to combine.  
This title will remain in the same place after  
combining with another title.  
Genre Name  
HDD  
ENTER  
Use this command to rename one of the ten  
user-definable genres (Free 1 to Free 10).  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from  
the command menu panel.  
ENTER  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
1
Select ‘Genre Name’ from the  
1
2
23:00 FRI 3/12  
command menu panel.  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Title name  
Se
t
T
h
u
m
b
ail
n
4
Titles  
EraseSection  
20:00 FRI 3/12  
Divide  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
Chapter Edit  
Play List  
10Titles  
Move  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
3
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 P
Combine  
Play  
SP  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
Erase  
Cancel  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
9
8
7
4
20:00 FRI 3/12  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
DVD  
VR Mode  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
S
2
SP  
Recent first  
All Genres  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Genre Name  
Remain  
0h30m  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
S
Multi-Mode  
19:00 MON 29/11  
HDD  
SP  
ENTER  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
3
Select another title to  
combine with the first.  
This title will be appended to the first title  
selected.  
ENTER  
2
Select one of the user-  
The screen below shows title 3 selected to be  
appended to title 1:  
definable genre names.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Free1  
1
2
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
Free2  
4
SP  
4
Titles  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Free3  
4
Titles  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Free4  
Free5  
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
9
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Free6  
Free7
Play List  
MENU  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
3
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
19:00 MON 29/11  
HDD  
SP  
4
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
1h00m(1.0G)  
30h30m  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 99 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
09  
Editing  
ENTER  
ENTER  
3
Input a name for the genre.  
1
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the  
• The name can be up to 12 characters  
long.  
command menu panel.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
• For information on remote control key  
short cuts, see Using the remote key  
shortcuts to input a name on page 92.  
10Titles  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Play  
SP  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
Erase  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
S
Recent first  
All Genres  
Genre Name  
Input Genre Name  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
Free  
1
7
S
Multi-Mode  
A B C D E  
F
G H  
I
J
K L M  
.
(
I
,
)
I
ß
_
}
˚
`
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
N
A
D
0
O
A
N
1
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R
A
O
4
S T U V WX Y Z  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
ç
HDD  
SP  
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
ˆ
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
2
SP  
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
$
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
&
~
+
/
@
¥
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
©
¬
/2  
®
/4  
< < 14  
/
o
1
3
2
3
1
¿
´
Space  
OK  
Clear  
ENTER  
2
Select titles from the title list.  
Selected titles are marked with a .  
ENTER  
4
and exit.  
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name  
ENTER  
3
Select the command that you  
want applied to all the marked titles.  
For example, select Erase to erase all the  
marked titles.  
Multi-Mode  
HDD  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
Multi-Mode  
3Titles  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Multi-Mode allows you to select several  
titles, then select a command that will be  
applied to all of them. In this way you can  
select multiple titles and then erase them all  
at once, for example.  
Erase  
Lock  
4
SP  
2
4
Titles  
Unlock  
9
Change Genre  
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
S
Recent first  
All Genres  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
Single Mode  
7
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
HDD  
SP  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
Once the command is completed, Multi-  
Mode is automatically exited.  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 100 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
09  
Editing  
Undo  
Frequently asked questions  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW  
• Why doesn’t the available recording time  
increase when I erase titles from a VR  
mode DVD-R?  
If you make a mistake while editing, you can  
generally undo it. There is one level of undo  
(in other words, you can only undo the last  
edit you made).  
When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or  
DVD+R), the titles are no longer  
displayed, but the content remains on  
the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once  
media; they can’t be erased or rewritten.  
ENTER  
Select ‘Undo’ from the  
command menu panel.  
• You can’t undo anything after exiting the  
• I can’t edit my disc!  
Disc Navigator screen.  
You may find that as the available  
recording time is reduced on a VR mode  
DVD-R disc, editing is no longer  
possible. This is because information  
about your edits requires a certain  
amount of disc space. As you edit, this  
information builds up, eventually  
preventing you from editing further.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
0Titles  
Play  
No title  
Erase  
2
4
Titles  
Edit  
Play List  
Create  
Undo  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 101 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
10  
Copying and backup  
CChaoptpery10ing and backup  
When real-time copying from the HDD to a  
Introduction  
Video mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW,  
the chapter markers in the original material  
are not copied. Chapter markers are put into  
the copy at intervals, according to the Auto  
Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter  
(Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on  
page 140).  
Use the copying features of this recorder to:  
• Back up important recordings stored on  
the HDD to a DVD.  
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the  
HDD to play in another player.  
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD  
for editing.  
Restrictions on copying  
Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected  
using Copy Guard. These discs cannot be  
copied to the HDD.  
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to  
DVD.  
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the  
One Touch Copy feature. This copies the  
currently playing HDD title to DVD, or DVD  
title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy on  
page 102 for detailed instructions.  
Some video material is copy-once protected.  
This means that it can be recorded to HDD,  
but it can’t then be freely copied again. If you  
want to transfer copy-once protected  
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a  
CPRM ver. 1.1 or higher VR mode DVD-RW,  
ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode DVD-R, or CPRM-  
compatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM on  
page 57 for more on this). Only one instance  
of a copy-once protected title can be added  
to the Copy List, and after it’s been copied,  
the title is erased from the HDD (it is  
For more sophisticated copying tasks you  
can build a Copy List of titles to copy, and  
edit titles so that you only copy the bits you  
want. See Using Copy Lists on page 103 for  
detailed instructions.  
Where possible, the recorder will copy your  
recordings at high-speed. Depending on the  
recording mode, the kind of disc loaded and  
various other factors, copying can be as fast  
as one minute per hour of video. See  
Minimum copying times on page 146 for  
more on copying times.  
therefore not possible to copy a locked title  
that is copy-once protected).  
You can identify copy-once protected  
material during playback by displaying disc  
information on-screen. If the current title is  
copy-once protected, an exclamation mark  
( ! ) is shown.  
If you want to save disc space you can copy  
video at a lower recording quality (for  
example, an XP recording on the HDD  
copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way  
is always done in real-time.  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 102 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
10  
Copying and backup  
• High-speed copying is used when  
copying from the HDD to DVD. Playback  
continues while copying.  
Copyright  
Recording equipment should be used only  
for lawful copying and you are advised to  
check carefully what is lawful copying in the  
country in which you are making a copy.  
Copying of copyright material such as films  
or music is unlawful unless permitted by a  
legal exception or consented to by the  
rightowners.  
• Real-time copying is used when copying  
from DVD to the HDD. Playback restarts  
from the beginning of the title.  
Canceling One Touch Copy  
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s  
started.  
ONE TOUCH COPY  
One Touch Copy  
Press and hold for more than a  
second.  
* See also Copyright above.  
Copying is canceled and the video already  
The One Touch Copy feature copies the  
currently playing or selected (in the Disc  
Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to  
HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of  
where in the title you start the copy.  
copied is erased.  
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/+R copy,  
the space available for recording does  
not return to the pre-copy figure.  
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same  
recording mode. When copying DVD to  
HDD, the copy is made in whatever  
recording mode is currently set.  
Notes on copying using One Touch  
Copy  
Copying to DVD  
Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is  
loaded when trying to copy from the HDD.  
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as  
thumbnail picture markers for the Disc  
Navigator, are also copied. However, if  
you copy to a Video mode DVD-R/-RW or  
DVD+R/+RW, only the first 40  
REC MODE  
SHIFT  
1
+
If you’re copying from DVD  
to the HDD, select a recording mode.  
Note that selecting a recording mode higher  
than the title playing will not result in a better  
quality recording.  
characters of a name are copied.  
• The chapter markers in the copy may not  
be in exactly the same positions as the  
original when recording on to a Video  
mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW.  
ONE TOUCH COPY  
2
Press during playback to copy  
the current title.  
The front panel display indicates that the title  
is being copied.  
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy  
function to copy a title if any part of the  
title is copy-once protected.  
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios  
can’t be copied to a Video mode disc.  
Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM  
disc for this type of material.  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 103 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
10  
Copying and backup  
1
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes )  
widescreen material can’t be copied to a  
Video mode disc. Use a VR mode  
DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM disc for this  
type of material.  
Using Copy Lists  
* See also Copyright on page 102.  
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of  
HDD or DVD titles that you want to copy.  
When copying HDD titles to DVD, you can,  
however, edit the titles in your copy list,  
erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-  
naming titles, for example. Edits you make to  
titles in the Copy List do not affect the actual  
video content; only the ‘virtual’ content of the  
Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify  
anything in your Copy List safe in the  
knowledge that the actual content is not  
being altered.  
• When HDD Recording Format is set to  
Video Mode Off, titles recorded in LP/  
MN9 to MN15 modes cannot be high-  
speed copied to a Video mode disc.  
Please use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or  
DVD-RAM.  
• Recordings of bilingual broadcasts  
cannot be high-speed copied to a Video  
mode DVD. Please use a VR mode DVD-  
R/-RW or DVD-RAM.  
• Titles over 8 hours cannot be copied to  
single-layer DVD+R/+RW discs using  
One Touch Copy. Use DVD+R DL discs  
for titles over 8 hours.  
Copying from HDD to DVD  
Important  
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP  
or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/  
+RW using One Touch Copy.  
• The recorder can only store one Copy List  
at a time.  
• The Copy List is erased if the Input Line  
System setting is changed (see  
Additional information about the TV  
system settings on page 144).  
Copying to the HDD  
• The maximum title length for copying is  
12 hours.  
• Title name and chapter markers are also  
copied, except when copying from a  
finalized Video mode disc.  
• Resetting the recorder to its factory  
settings (see Resetting the recorder on  
page 160) will erase the Copy List.  
• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter  
markers for the Disc Navigator are  
copied, but their position in the copy  
may be slightly changed from the  
original.  
1
Load a recordable DVD.  
• It is possible to complete the following  
steps without having a recordable DVD  
loaded (or having an uninitialized DVD  
loaded); however, the steps are slightly  
different.  
• If some part of the title being copied is  
copy-protected, copying will start, but  
the copy-protected portions will not be  
copied.  
• If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode)  
disc for the copy, make sure it is  
initialized before you start.  
Note  
1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 104 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
10  
Copying and backup  
HOME MENU  
2
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home  
ENTER  
Menu.  
5
Add titles to the Copy List  
(highlight a title and press ENTER to add).  
ENTER  
8
Title  
Copy  
Select Title  
HDD  
DVD (Video mode)  
3
Select ‘HDD DVD’.  
1
>
2
>
3
If this is the first time to create a Copy List,  
skip to step 5 below.  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
WED 29/03 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr  
MON 27/03 21:00 Mon27/03 Pr  
S A T 25/03 23:00 S a t 25/03 Pr  
THU 23/03 22:00 Thu 23/03 Pr  
WED 22/03 20:00 Wed22/03 Pr  
MON 20/03 13:00 Mon20/03 Pr  
F R I 17/03 21:00 F r i 17/03 Pr  
WED 15/03 20:00 Wed15/03 Pr  
2
4
9
6
2
9
4
2
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
Pr  
Pr  
Pr  
Pr  
Pr  
Pr  
Pr  
Pr  
2
4
9
6
2
9
4
2
Back  
Next  
Recent first  
All Genres  
HDD  
DVD  
HDD  
DVD/CD  
20:00  
20:00  
Wed29/03  
Pr  
1h00m(2.0G)  
Sports SP  
2
SP  
Pr  
2
Disc Back-up  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
0.0G  
4.3G  
4
If there is already a Copy List stored  
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are  
highlighted in pink.  
in the recorder, choose whether to  
‘Create New Copy List’ or ‘Continue  
Using Previous Copy List’.  
There are some restrictions on titles that can  
be added to the Copy List if you are copying  
to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW:  
• When adding titles that contain copy-  
once protected material, the copy-once  
parts will not be added.  
Continue Using Previous Copy List  
Create New Copy List  
• When adding titles that contain material  
of more than one aspect ratio (screen  
size), each part with a different aspect  
ratio will be added as a separate title if  
high-speed copying is possible.  
• If you select Continue Using Previous  
Copy List, skip to step 10 below.  
• Selecting Create New Copy List will  
erase any Copy List already stored in the  
recorder.  
1
Depending on the title , high-speed copying  
may not be possible to a Video mode disc.  
Note  
1 • Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8  
(Video Mode On).  
LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off.  
• Bilingual recordings.  
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 105 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
10  
Copying and backup  
6
Press to display the command  
A menu of editing commands appears:  
menu panel.  
Erase – Erase individual titles from the  
Copy List (see Erase on page 91).  
The Command Menu panel  
Title Name – Name or rename a title in  
the Copy List (see Title Name on  
page 91).  
8
Title  
Copy  
Select Title  
HDD  
DVD (Video mode)  
1
>
2
>
3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
WED 29/03 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr  
MON 27/03 21:00 Mon27/03 Pr  
S A T 25/03 23:00 S a t 25/03 Pr  
THU 23/03 22:00 Thu 23/03 Pr  
WED 22/03 20:00 Wed22/03 Pr  
MON 20/03 13:00 Mon20/03 Pr  
F R I 17/03 21:00 F r i 17/03 Pr  
WED 15/03 20:00 Wed15/03 Pr  
2
4
9
6
2
9
4
2
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
SP  
Pr  
Pr  
Pr  
Pr  
Pr  
Pr  
Pr  
Pr  
2
4
9
6
2
9
4
2
Back  
Next  
Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see  
Erase Section on page 93).  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Move – Change the order of titles in the  
Copy List (see Move on page 97).  
20:00  
20:00  
Wed29/03  
Pr  
1h00m(2.0G)  
Sports SP  
2
SP  
Pr  
2
Preview – Check the content of a title in  
the Copy List.  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
4.3G  
4.3G  
Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List  
into two (see Divide on page 94).  
7
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title  
Edit screen.  
Combine – Combine two titles in the  
Copy List into one (see Combine on  
page 98).  
2
Title  
Copy  
HDD  
DVD (Video mode)  
Title Edit  
1
>
2
>
3
1
2
20:00 Wed  
20:00 Wed  
29/03 Pr  
22/03 Pr  
2
2
SP  
SP  
Back  
Next  
Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a  
Copy List title (see Chapter Edit on  
page 95):  
Divide – Divide a chapter into two.  
Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/  
Change the chapter order.  
Combine – Combine two chapters  
into one.  
20:00  
Wed29/03  
Pr  
2
SP  
1h00m(2.0G)  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
4.3G  
4.3G  
8
To edit a title, highlight it using the  
ꢁ/ꢂ buttons, then press ENTER.  
Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail  
frame for a title (see Set Thumbnail on  
page 93).  
2
Title  
Copy  
Title Edit  
HDD  
DVD (Video mode)  
1
>
2
>
3
Recording Mode – Set the picture  
quality of the copy (see Recording Mode  
on page 108).  
1
2
20:00 Wed  
20:00 Wed  
29
Erase  
22
Title Name  
Back  
Next  
Erase Section  
Move  
Preview  
Bilingual – Set how bilingual audio  
should be copied when copying from  
HDD to Video mode DVD (see Bilingual  
on page 108).  
Cancel  
20:00  
Wed29/03  
Pr  
2
SP  
1h00m(2.0G)  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
4.3G  
4.3G  
Cancel – Exit the menu.  
Repeat this step for as many titles you have  
that need editing.  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 106 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
10  
Copying and backup  
ENTER  
9
Display the command menu  
Select ‘Next’ to proceed.  
11  
copying.  
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start  
panel.  
Copy  
HDD DVD (Video Mode)  
ENTER  
1 > 2 > 3  
Start Copy  
10  
HDD  
DVD-RW  
Video Mode  
Return  
Recording Mode  
Input Disc Name  
Finalize  
Copy Time 0h 16m  
Recording Mode  
Disc Name  
High-Speed  
Off  
2
Title  
Copy  
Title Edit  
HDD  
DVD (Video mode)  
1
>
2
>
3
Finalize  
1
2
20:00 Wed  
20:00 Wed  
29/03 Pr  
22/03 Pr  
2
2
SP  
SP  
Start Copy  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
4.3G  
4.3G  
Back  
Next  
• If you’re using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL  
disc and the copy will span both layers,  
the Copy List Total bar will be purple.  
20:00  
Wed29/03  
Pr  
2
SP  
1h00m(2.0G)  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
4.3G  
4.3G  
• The Current DVD Remain bar will be  
half-length if the first layer of a DVD-R DL  
or DVD+R DL disc is already full.  
There are several options available from the  
next screen:  
• Select Recording Mode if you want to  
change the recording quality (see  
1
Recording Mode on page 108).  
• Select Input Disc Name if you want to  
change the disc name. Input a name of  
up to 64 characters for a VR mode disc or  
40 characters for a Video mode disc or  
DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is  
similar to that of naming titles; see Title  
Name on page 91.)  
• Select Finalize if you want to  
automatically finalize a Video mode DVD  
2
or DVD+R after copying. Select a title  
menu style from the following screen.  
Note  
1 Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using high-speed copy.  
2 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 107 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
10  
Copying and backup  
Copying from DVD to HDD  
ENTER  
4
Add titles to the Copy List  
Important  
(highlight a title and press ENTER to add).  
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are  
highlighted in pink.  
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t  
accessible when a finalized Video mode  
disc or a DVD-Video is loaded. As long as  
the disc is not Copy Guard protected, you  
can still use the One Touch Copy  
function, however (See One Touch Copy  
on page 102).  
ENTER  
5
Select ‘Next’ from the  
command menu panel to proceed to the  
title edit screen.  
• The recorder can only store one Copy List  
at a time.  
ENTER  
6
Select a title to edit.  
• The Copy List will be erased if:  
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are  
erased or edited.  
A menu appears of Copy List editing  
commands:  
– the disc tray is opened.  
– playback is switched between Play List  
and Original.  
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or  
finalized.  
– the recorder is reset to its factory  
settings (see Resetting the recorder on  
page 160).  
Erase – Erase individual titles from the  
Copy List (see Erase on page 91).  
Move – Change the order of titles in the  
Copy List (see Move on page 97).  
Preview – Check the content of a title in  
the Copy List.  
Cancel – Exit the menu.  
• It may not be possible to copy from a  
DVD disc that was recorded on a  
different DVD recorder or a PC.  
Repeat this step for as many titles you have  
that need editing.  
HOME MENU  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home  
7
Select ‘Next’ from the  
Menu.  
command menu panel to proceed to the  
copy options screen.  
• Select Recording Mode if you want to  
change the recording quality (see  
Recording Mode on page 108).  
ENTER  
2
3
Select ‘DVD/CD HDD’.  
ENTER  
Select a Copy List type.  
ENTER  
8
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start  
• Selecting Create New Copy List will  
erase any Copy List already stored in the  
recorder.  
copying.  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 108 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
10  
Copying and backup  
start copying. In this case, either change the  
recording quality, or press RETURN to go  
back to the Copy List screen and erase one  
or more titles from the Copy List.  
Recording Mode  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Recording Mode’ from  
the command menu panel.  
Bilingual  
ENTER  
2
Select a recording mode for  
1
Select the title containing the  
the copy.  
1
audio you want to change.  
High-Speed Copy – The Copy List is  
copied at the same recording quality as  
the original.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Bilingual’ from the  
2
XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN – The Copy  
command menu panel.  
List is copied at the specified recording  
quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy  
at a higher quality setting than the  
original, the copy will not be better  
quality than the original.)  
ENTER  
3
Select a bilingual audio  
option.  
If you select MN above, you can also  
change the level setting (MN1 to MN32  
3
Using disc backup  
or LPCM) from the Recording Quality box  
that appears.  
2,4  
* See also Copyright on page 102.  
Optimized – The recording quality is  
This feature offers a simple way to make a  
backup copy of a finalized Video mode disc  
or DVD+R/+RW. The data is copied first to  
the hard disk drive , then on to another  
recordable DVD disc.  
automatically adjusted so that the Copy  
List fits on to the space available on the  
disc. Copying is carried out in real-time.  
5
When you change the recording mode  
setting, you can see how much disc space it  
will require. If this is more than is available,  
it shows up in red and you won’t be able to  
Note  
1 When copying to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly  
the same position as the original.  
2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD or  
DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at reg-  
ular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video)) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/  
+RW) on page 140.  
3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available.  
4 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD.  
5 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 109 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
10  
Copying and backup  
HOME MENU  
• To see the progress of the backup, press  
DISPLAY.  
1
Select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc backup’  
from the Home Menu.  
• You can cancel the backup process by  
pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more  
than one second.  
ENTER  
2
Select a backup option.  
5
When the data has been copied, take  
out the disc and load a blank* recordable  
DVD.  
* If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the  
disc doesn’t have to be blank, although the  
previous contents of the disc will be erased in  
the backup process.  
Start new disc back-up  
Resume writing date  
Erase back-up date  
There are three backup options:  
Disc Back-up  
Start new disc backup – Start making a  
backup of a disc.  
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.  
Please eject the disc and load a  
recordable disc  
Resume writing data – Record the  
backup data already on the HDD to a  
recordable DVD.  
Cancel  
Start  
You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0 or 2.1 disc, or  
DVD-RW ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the  
backup.  
Erase backup data – Erase the backup  
data on the HDD.  
3
Load the disc you want to make a  
backup of.  
You can only make backup copies of  
finalized Video mode discs, finalized DVD+R  
or DVD+RW discs (excluding DVD-R DL/  
DVD+R DL discs).  
• If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW,  
you cannot undo the finalization later.  
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary  
so there may be cases where the  
contents of the disc you’re backing-up  
will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If  
this happens, please try another brand of  
disc.  
Disc Back-up  
No disc.  
• DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up  
to DVD-R/-RW discs; DVD+R/+RW  
discs can only be backed up to DVD+R/  
+RW discs.  
Please load a disc to be backed-up.  
Cancel  
Start  
6
Select ‘Start’ to start writing the  
ENTER  
backed-up data to the blank disc.  
4
Select ‘Start’.  
Disc Back-up  
Disc Back-up  
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.  
The disc contents will be overwritten.  
OK to start?  
Read from disc and save to HDD.  
Start reading?  
Cancel  
Start  
Cancel  
Start  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 110 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
10  
Copying and backup  
• To see the progress of the backup, press  
DISPLAY.  
• You can cancel the backup process by  
pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more  
than one second. However, this will  
make the disc unusable (although if you  
are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc  
you can re-initialize it in order to make it  
usable again—see Initializing recordable  
DVD discs on page 70.)  
7
After the recorder has finished  
recording the backup disc, you can select  
whether to make another backup of the  
same data or exit.  
Disc Back-up  
Disc back-up finished.  
To make another back-up copy, please load  
a recordable disc.  
Cancel  
Start  
• Select Start to make another backup  
copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to  
make another backup copy, return to  
step 6 above.  
8
If you don’t need to keep the backup  
data on the HDD, you can delete it now.  
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD;  
select No to keep it (you can delete it later if  
you want to).  
Disc Back-up  
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.  
Erasing it will increase the free space  
available. OK to Erase?  
No  
Yes  
• If you decide to leave the backup data on  
the HDD, you can make backup copies  
to recordable DVD discs anytime from  
the Disc Back-up menu.  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 111 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
11  
Using the Jukebox  
Chapter 11  
Using the Jukebox  
The Jukebox feature allows you to use the  
Important  
recorder’s HDD to store and playback music  
from up to 999 of your CDs. You can also  
transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CD-R/-  
RW/-ROM or USB device. Once on the HDD,  
you can name albums, assign them a genre,  
and set tracks that you don’t want to play to  
Jump.  
• While copying CD audio, no other  
recorder operation is possible.  
• When copying CD audio, scheduled  
timer recordings will not start until  
copying is complete.  
• Copy protected CDs may not copy  
successfully.  
Copying music to the HDD  
1
Load the CD you want to copy to the  
HDD.  
The first step is to copy some music to the  
HDD. CD audio is copied in real-time, while  
WMA and MP3 files are copied at high  
HOME MENU  
2
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home  
Menu.  
1
speed. All tracks are copied from each CD  
as an album.  
ENTER  
WMA/MP3 album and track names are  
copied along with the audio. CD album and  
track names are not copied, but you can add  
these later (see Editing Jukebox albums on  
page 113).  
3
Select ‘DVD/CD to HDD’.  
On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the  
CD are copied to the HDD.  
• You can also start copying by starting  
playback of the CD (including program  
play) and then pressing ONE TOUCH  
COPY.  
Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in  
the order they appear on the CD. When  
copying CD audio, you can copy them in  
some other order using the program play  
mode. See Program play on page 80 for how  
to do this.  
• To cancel copying an audio CD, press  
and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more  
than one second.  
• To cancel copying a WMA/MP3 disc,  
press ENTER.  
Note that once copied to the HDD, audio  
tracks cannot be copied to a recordable DVD  
disc.  
• If the CD loaded contains both CD audio  
tracks and WMA/MP3 files, the part  
currently selected will play.  
Note  
1 The recorder can copy up to 999 CDs; a CD can contain up to 99 tracks. The recorded audio format is 256 kbps  
Dolby Digital.  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 112 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
11  
Using the Jukebox  
Copying files from a USB  
device  
Playing music from the  
Jukebox  
DVR-645H-S only  
You can select albums or individual tracks  
from the Jukebox to play.  
1
You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a  
connected USB device, such as a USB drive,  
to the HDD.  
HOME MENU  
1
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home  
Menu.  
1
Connect the USB device.  
HOME MENU  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home  
2
Select a Jukebox option.  
Listen to Music/Edit – Listen to CDs  
that have been copied to the HDD.  
Menu.  
ENTER  
Listen to Music (WMA/MP3)/Edit –  
Listen to WMA or MP3 files that have  
been stored on the HDD.  
3
Select ‘Listen to Music from  
USB Device’.  
Listen to Music from USB device (DVR-  
645H-S only) – Listen to music from an  
external USB device.  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Copy Album’ from the  
command menu panel.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
3
Select what you want to play.  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
The screen below shows CD albums stored  
on the HDD:  
to cancel.  
The selected folder on the USB device will be  
copied to the HDD.  
Album name  
• Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB  
device can be copied/displayed.  
Jukebox  
10Albums  
3
4
Album1  
Album2  
ALL  
1
Play  
Erase  
Edit  
By number  
5
6
7
8
9
Album3  
Album4  
Album5  
Album6  
Album7  
2
3
Play Mode  
4
All Genres  
5
Genre Name  
6
7
10 Album8  
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup  
HDD  
1-10  
0.03.58  
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep  
Total 12 1.14.58  
classical  
Remain  
60h30m  
Info for selected album  
Playback status  
• If you select a whole album to play, all  
tracks that are not set to Jump will play.  
Note  
1 The digital audio output contains a copy-prohibit signal when albums are playing from the HDD.  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 113 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
11  
Using the Jukebox  
• If you want to start playback from a  
selected track in an album, or play a  
track that is set to Jump, press to  
enter the track list then select a track to  
play.  
Genre  
Jukebox  
10Albums  
Play  
Erase  
Edit  
ALL  
1
Sort
All Genres m2  
By
No Category  
m3  
m4  
m5  
m6  
m7  
m8  
2
Best  
Rock  
Pop  
Genr
3
Play Mode  
• Press SHIFT + SUBTITLE or SHIFT +  
ANGLE to change the page.  
4
A
Jazz  
5
Genre Name  
Classical  
6
7
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup  
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep  
Total 12 1.14.58  
HDD  
1-10  
Changing the album view  
0.03.58  
Remain  
60h30m  
All Genres – All albums are displayed.  
1
From the album list, display  
Genre – Only albums in the selected  
genre are displayed.  
the view options menu panel.  
ENTER  
Editing Jukebox albums  
2
Select a view option.  
A number of commands are available for  
editing and changing the playback behavior  
of albums.  
Jukebox  
10Albums  
ALL  
1
Play  
Sort
By number m2  
Erase  
Edit  
By
By favorite  
m3  
m4  
m5  
m6  
m7  
m8  
2
By album  
Genr
3
Play Mode  
HOME MENU  
4
A
Cancel  
1
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home  
5
Genre Name  
6
Menu.  
7
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup  
HDD  
1-10  
0.03.58  
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep  
Total 12 1.14.58  
classical  
Remain  
60h30m  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Listen to Music/Edit’ or  
Sort order  
‘Listen to Music (WMA/MP3)/Edit’.  
By number – Albums are listed by the  
album number.  
ENTER  
By favorite – Most often listened to  
music appears at the top of the list.  
3
Select what you want to edit.  
By album – Albums are listed  
ENTER  
alphabetically.  
4
Select an edit function from  
the command menu panel.  
Erase – Erase the selected track (if all  
tracks in an album are selected, the  
whole album is erased).  
Edit > Edit Title – Enter a name of up to  
64 characters for the album. See page  
Title Name on page 91 for how to enter  
names.  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 114 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
11  
Using the Jukebox  
Edit > Set Genre – Set or change the  
genre for the album.  
1
Edit > Jump Set – Set a track to jump  
so that it doesn't play (choose this  
command again to cancel the Jump  
setting).  
Play Mode – Change the playback order  
for albums and tracks.  
Genre Name – Enter a name of up to 12  
characters for a genre. See page Title  
Name on page 91 for how to enter  
names.  
Note  
1 Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback.  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 115 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
The PhotoViewer (DVR-645H-S)  
Chapter 12  
12  
The PhotoViewer  
(DVR-645H-S)  
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG  
photos and picture files stored on the HDD,  
recordable DVD or CD-R/-RW/-ROM, or on a  
Copy photos from a USB device – Copy  
all photos on a connected USB device to  
the HDD.  
1
USB-equipped digital camera. You can also  
import files and save them to the recorder’s  
HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc.  
ENTER  
3
Select the folder containing  
the files you want to view, copy or edit.  
Currently selected  
folder in folder list  
Currently selected File information  
thumbnail  
Locating JPEG picture files  
PhotoViewer  
HDD  
HOME MENU  
File  
Chair No.  
2
Date/Time  
10:00 24/01/2006  
x
1
Select ‘PhotoViewer’ from the  
Size  
1920 1440  
1
2
5
8
3
6
9
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
Home Menu.  
4
7
ENTER  
2
Select the location of the files  
you want to view or edit.  
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
1/2  
1/3  
View/Edit photos on the HDD  
Pages in  
folder list  
Incompatible/  
unknown file  
Pages in  
file view  
View photos on  
a
CD/DVD  
View photos on  
a
USB device  
a USB device  
• If you encounter a disc that will not play,  
check that the disc and file formats are  
compatible with this recorder (see JPEG  
file compatibility on page 11 and PC-  
created disc compatibility on page 12).  
Copy photos from  
View/Edit photos on the HDD – View  
or edit photos already stored on the  
recorder’s HDD.  
View photos on a CD/DVD – View  
photos on a Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CD-  
R/-RW, or DVD-R/-RW.  
View photos on a USB device – View  
photos on a digital camera (or other USB  
device) connected to the USB port.  
Note  
1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected  
USB camera it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB  
device on page 116).  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 116 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
The PhotoViewer (DVR-645H-S)  
12  
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some  
pictures may be displayed with black  
bars top and bottom, or left and right.  
Playing a slideshow  
• Large picture files may take a few  
seconds to display. This is normal.  
ENTER  
1
Select a folder from the folder  
• During playback of the slideshow you  
can listen to WMA/MP3 files in the  
Slideshow genre (see Editing Jukebox  
albums on page 113).  
list.  
The first nine images from the selected  
folder are displayed as thumbnails in the  
main part of the screen.  
STOP  
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes  
the recorder to load the file.  
5
Press to return to the thumbnail  
view area.  
• You can also use the RETURN button.  
• To start the slideshow from the first file in  
the folder, skip to step 4 after pressing  
ENTER.  
RETURN  
6
Press to return to the folder view  
ENTER  
area.  
2
Select ‘File Selection’ from the  
• With the leftmost thumbnail highlighted,  
you can use the button.  
• To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME  
MENU.  
menu.  
The first thumbnail image is highlighted.  
• You can also select a folder, then press  
to get to the thumbnail view area.  
• To get back to the folder list, press  
RETURN (or when the leftmost  
thumbnail is highlighted).  
Reloading files from a disc or USB  
device  
If you have a disc with more than 1000 files  
and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the  
images using the reload function.  
3
4
Select a thumbnail.  
• Use PREV and NEXT to display  
the previous/next page of thumbnails.  
1
Navigate to the last entry in  
the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).  
ENTER  
Select ‘Start Slideshow’ from  
ENTER  
the menu.  
2
Load the next batch of up to 999  
• You can also select a file or folder then  
press PLAY to start playing the  
slideshow.  
• Use PREV / NEXT to display the  
previous/next picture, or PAUSE to  
pause the slideshow.  
files/99 folders from the disc or  
connected USB device.  
It will take a moment (at most a few minutes)  
1
to load in the images.  
Note  
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter  
the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading if from a CD or DVD.)  
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 117 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
The PhotoViewer (DVR-645H-S)  
12  
Zooming an image  
Importing files to the HDD  
During a slideshow you can zoom in to  
enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of  
two or four. You can also move the area of  
the picture displayed.  
You can import files and save them on to the  
1
HDD from a CD, DVD or a connected USB  
camera. Once on the HDD you can edit and  
organize your pictures and print them out if  
you’ve connected a PictBridge-compatible  
printer.  
ENTER  
1
Press during the slideshow to  
zoom the picture.  
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off,  
2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is  
displayed on-screen.  
ENTER  
1
Select the location of folders/  
files you want to import.  
To import a whole folder, press ENTER here  
and skip to step 4 below.  
2
Use to move the zoomed  
area.  
• To import multiple folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 118.  
Rotating an image  
You can rotate the displayed picture during a  
slideshow so you can always view pictures  
the right way up, whichever way they were  
taken.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘File Selection’ from the  
menu.  
SHIFT  
ANGLE  
3
Select a file to import, then press  
+
Press during the slideshow  
ENTER.  
to rotate the displayed picture clockwise  
by 90º.  
Press repeatedly to continue rotating the  
• To import multiple folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 118.  
picture in increments of 90º.  
Note  
1 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW.  
117  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 118 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
The PhotoViewer (DVR-645H-S)  
12  
ENTER  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the  
2
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the  
menu.  
menu.  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
PhotoViewer  
12/13 WED  
CD/DVD  
HDD  
File  
2
Folder  
Date/Time  
10:00 24/01/2006  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
1
2
5
8
1
4
7
2
5
8
Start Slideshow  
Copy all to HDD  
File selection  
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
001. 12/12 TUE  
Start Slideshow  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
Copy to HDD  
New Folder  
4
7
Print  
Folder Options  
Multi-Mode  
Copy to DVD  
Multi-Mode  
Cancel  
Cancel  
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
Use [][] to select, then press [] to  
select file. Press ENTER to display menu.  
1/2  
1/3  
1/2  
1/3  
ENTER  
ENTER  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and  
3
To add a file/folder to the list,  
copy the folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to  
cancel.  
• The files will be copied to the HDD with  
select it, then choose ‘Select’ from the  
menu.  
A checkbox mark () is shown by the item  
you selected.  
the same folder structure as the original.  
• Importing to the HDD will not work if  
there is insufficient space on the HDD,  
or if there are already the maximum  
number of files and/or folders on the  
HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder).  
• You can also select a file or folder and  
press STOP to add it to the list.  
• To remove a file/folder from the list,  
select Cancel Selection from the menu.  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
HDD  
Multi-Mode  
File  
2
Selecting multiple files or folders  
The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple  
folders/files at once for importing or editing.  
Date/Time  
10:00 24/01/2006  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
1
2
5
8
3
6
9
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
4
7
ENTER  
1
Select the folder containing  
Press STOP or ENTER to display the menu  
and cancel selection.  
1/2  
1/3  
the files you want to import.  
ENTER  
4
5
Display the command menu.  
Select the command you want  
ENTER  
to apply to all the selected items.  
118  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 119 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
The PhotoViewer (DVR-645H-S)  
12  
however that you may need to finalize the  
Importing files from a USB  
device  
disc before it will play on another DVD player  
(copying selected files doesn’t automatically  
finalize the disc).  
Use this feature to copy all the files on a  
connected USB device to this recorder’s  
HDD.  
Important  
• A maximum of 99 titles can be recorded.  
• Slideshows can contain up to 99 files. If  
there are more files than this in the  
slideshow, multiple slideshows are  
created on the disc.  
Important  
• After backing up the pictures on your  
USB device to HDD, we recommend  
verifying that they have been recorded  
properly before deleting anything from  
the camera.  
• If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD  
the slideshow will become unplayable  
but the free space will not increase.  
1
Load a blank (or unfinalized Video  
ENTER  
mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.  
1
Select ‘Copy photos from a  
USB device’ from the main PhotoViewer  
menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘View/Edit Photos on  
the HDD’ from the menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
ENTER  
• While the files are being imported, any  
timer programs set to start will not  
begin, and no other operation is  
possible.  
3
Select the file(s) or folder(s)  
you want to copy.  
• Copying a folder will copy all the files  
contained in it.  
• To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 118.  
Copying selected files to a  
DVD-R/-RW  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the  
This feature allows you just to copy some of  
the files stored on HDD to a DVD.  
menu.  
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on  
the disc as a Video mode title, making it  
possible to view the photos on other DVD  
players/recorders that may not be  
ENTER  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
compatible with JPEG file playback. Note  
• Folder names on the disc will be  
number PIONR. File names will be  
PHOT number.  
119  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 120 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
The PhotoViewer (DVR-645H-S)  
12  
• Note that during copying, any timer  
programs set to start will not begin, and  
no other operation is possible.  
Erasing a file or folder  
ENTER  
• While ‘Cancel’ is displayed, you can  
press ENTER to cancel.  
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s)  
you want to erase.  
• To erase multiple folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 118.  
Editing files on the HDD  
• Erasing a folder will erase all the files  
contained in it. Please be careful!  
There are a number of commands you can  
use to edit and organize your pictures stored  
on the HDD.  
• You can’t erase files that have been  
locked.  
• Folders containing locked files can’t be  
erased. Unlocked files in the folder,  
however, will be erased.  
Creating a new folder  
ENTER  
1
From the folder list, display the  
menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder  
Options’.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘New Folder’.  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
HDD  
The folder appears at the bottom of the folder  
File  
2
list with the name F_number.  
Date/Time  
10:00 24/01/2006  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
1
2
5
8
Start Slideshow  
File Options  
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
PhotoViewer  
12/13 WED  
HDD  
Print  
4
7
Copy to DVD  
Folder  
Multi-Mode  
1
4
7
2
5
8
File selection  
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
Cancel  
Start Slideshow  
New Folder  
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
Folder Options  
1/2  
1/3  
Copy to DVD  
Multi-Mode  
Cancel  
Use [][] to select, then press [] to  
select file. Press ENTER to display menu.  
ENTER  
1/2  
1/3  
3
Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’.  
• There can be up to 999 folders on the  
HDD.  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
HDD  
File  
2
Date/Time  
10:00 24/01/2006  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
1
2
5
8
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
tt Sdhw  
Erase  
Copy  
4
7
Rename File  
Lock  
Cancel  
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
1/2  
1/3  
120  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 121 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
The PhotoViewer (DVR-645H-S)  
12  
ENTER  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
to cancel.  
• You can also erase a file or folder by  
pressing CLEAR when the file or folder is  
highlighted. Press ENTER to confirm.  
• Copying to the HDD will not work if there  
is insufficient space on the HDD; if there  
are already the maximum number of  
files and/or folders on the HDD.  
Copying files  
Naming files and folders  
ENTER  
1
Select the file or folder you want to  
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s)  
rename.  
you want to copy.  
• Copying a folder will copy all the files  
You can’t rename files that have been  
locked.  
contained in it.  
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder  
• To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 118.  
Options’.  
3
Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename  
Folder’.  
ENTER  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
HDD  
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder  
Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder  
File  
2
Date/Time  
10:00 24/01/2006  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
Options’.  
1
2
5
8
tt Sdhw  
Erase  
Copy  
Rename Fil  
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
4
7
e
ENTER  
Lock  
3
Contents’.  
Cancel  
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
1/2  
1/3  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
HDD  
File  
2
Date/Time  
24/01/2006 10:00AM  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
4
Enter a new name for the file/folder.  
1
2
5
8
Start Slideshow  
Erase  
Copy  
Rename Fil  
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
Filenames or Foldernames can be up to 64  
characters long.  
4
7
e
Lock  
See Using the remote key shortcuts to input  
a name on page 92 for how to enter a name.  
Cancel  
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
1/2  
1/3  
Locking/Unlocking files  
Locking files will protect them from  
accidental erasure and prevent them from  
being renamed.  
ENTER  
4
Select a folder to copy the  
folder(s)/file(s) to.  
Use the same process to both lock and  
unlock files. Locked files are displayed in the  
PhotoViewer with a padlock icon.  
121  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 122 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
The PhotoViewer (DVR-645H-S)  
12  
• To print multiple folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 118.  
ENTER  
1
Select the file(s) you want to  
lock (or unlock).  
• To lock/unlock multiple folders, use the  
Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files  
or folders on page 118.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Print’ from the menu.  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
HDD  
File  
2
ENTER  
Date/Time  
10:00 24/01/2006  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder  
Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder  
1
2
5
8
Start Slideshow  
File Options  
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
Options’.  
Print  
4
7
Copy to DVD  
Multi-Mode  
ENTER  
Cancel  
3
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
Contents’.  
1/2  
1/3  
PhotoViewer  
Chair No.  
HDD  
It takes a moment for the recorder to  
File  
2
communicate with the printer. During this  
time you can press ENTER to cancel the  
print.  
Date/Time  
10:00 24/01/2006  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
1
2
5
8
Start Slideshow  
Erase  
Copy  
Rename Fil  
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
4
7
e
Lock  
ENTER  
Cancel  
3
Select ‘Start’ to confirm, or  
Press ENTER to display the menu.  
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.  
1/2  
1/3  
‘Cancel’ to cancel.  
• Once printing has started, you can  
cancel by pressing ENTER.  
Locked files are shown with a padlock icon  
next to them.  
Printing files  
Tip  
• Paper size and layout can be set; the  
options available depend on your  
printer—check the printer manual for  
details.  
Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer  
to the USB port will enable you to print out  
picture files stored on the HDD, or directly  
1
from a digital camera.  
• If the message Searching for printer.  
Please wait a moment continues to be  
displayed, try disconnecting then  
reconnecting the USB cable.  
Make sure that the printer (and your digital  
camera if you are using that as a source) is  
connected to the recorder before starting.  
• This recorder may not work correctly  
with all printers.  
ENTER  
1
Select the file(s) you want to  
print.  
Note  
1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly.  
122  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 123 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
13  
The PhotoViewer (DVR-545H-S)  
Chapter 13  
The PhotoViewer  
(DVR-545H-S)  
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-R/-RW/-  
1
ROM.  
Locating JPEG picture files  
Playing a slideshow  
HOME MENU  
1
Select ‘PhotoViewer’ from the  
ENTER  
Home Menu.  
1
Select a folder from the folder  
list.  
The first nine images from the selected  
folder are displayed as thumbnails in the  
main part of the screen.  
ENTER  
2
Select the folder containing  
the files you want to view.  
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes  
the recorder to load the file.  
Currently selected  
folder in folder list  
Currently selected File information  
thumbnail  
The first thumbnail image is highlighted.  
PhotoViewer  
• You can also select a folder, then press  
to get to the thumbnail view area.  
• To get back to the folder list, press  
RETURN (or when the leftmost  
thumbnail is highlighted).  
File  
Chair No.  
2
Date/Time  
10:00 24/01/2006  
x
Size  
1920 1440  
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
001. 12/12 TUE  
002. 12/13 WED  
003. 12/14 THU  
004. 12/15 FRI  
005. 12/16 SAT  
006. 12/17 SUN  
007. 12/18 MON  
008. 12/19 TUE  
ENTER  
Press ENTER to start slideshow. To  
return to folder list, press RETURN.  
1/2  
1/3  
2
Select a thumbnail from  
which to start the sideshow.  
• Use the PREV and NEXT  
buttons to display the previous/next  
page of thumbnails.  
Pages in  
Incompatible/  
unknown file  
Pages in  
file view  
folder list  
• If you encounter a disc that will not play,  
check that the disc and file formats are  
compatible with this recorder (see JPEG  
file compatibility on page 11 and PC-  
created disc compatibility on page 12).  
• You can also select a file or folder then  
press PLAY to start playing the  
slideshow.  
• Use PREV / NEXT to display the  
previous/next picture, or PAUSE to  
pause the slideshow.  
Note  
1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still possible  
to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc on page 124).  
123  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 124 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
13  
The PhotoViewer (DVR-545H-S)  
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some  
pictures may be displayed with black  
bars top and bottom, or left and right.  
Zooming an image  
During a slideshow you can zoom in to  
enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of  
two or four. You can also move the area of  
the picture displayed.  
• Large picture files may take a few  
seconds to display. This is normal.  
STOP  
ENTER  
1
Press during the slideshow to  
3
Press to return to the thumbnail  
zoom the picture.  
view area.  
• You can also use the RETURN button.  
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off,  
2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is  
displayed on-screen.  
RETURN  
4
Press to return to the folder view  
area.  
• With the leftmost thumbnail highlighted,  
you can use the button.  
• To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME  
2
Use to move the zoomed  
area.  
MENU.  
Rotating an image  
You can rotate the displayed picture during a  
slideshow so you can always view pictures  
the right way up, whichever way they were  
taken.  
Reloading files from a disc  
If you have a disc with more than 1000 files  
and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the  
images using the reload function.  
SHIFT  
ANGLE  
+
Press during the slideshow  
to rotate the displayed picture clockwise  
by 90º.  
1
Navigate to the last entry in  
Press repeatedly to continue rotating the  
the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).  
picture in increments of 90º.  
ENTER  
2
Load the next batch of up to 999  
files/99 folders from the disc.  
• It will take a moment (at most a few  
1
minutes) to load in the images.  
Note  
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter  
the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading.)  
124  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 125 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
14  
The Disc Setup menu  
Chapter 14  
The Disc Setup menu  
From the Disc Setup menu you can name  
discs, lock the contents to prevent  
accidental recording and erasure, initialize  
and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is  
accessed from the Home menu:  
ENTER  
3
Input a name for the disc.  
The disc name can be up to 64 characters  
long for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video  
mode discs and DVD+R/+RW.  
• See Title Name on page 91 for more on  
navigating the input screen.  
Basic settings  
Lock Disc  
Input Disc Name  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
• Default setting: Off  
When you initialize a disc for recording, the  
recorder automatically assigns a name for  
the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99. You  
can use the Input Disc Name function to  
change the default disc name to something  
more descriptive. This name appears when  
you load the disc and when you display disc  
information on-screen.  
Locking the disc will prevent accidental  
recording, editing or erasing of the disc.  
Important  
• A locked disc can still be initialized  
(which will completely erase the disc).  
HOME MENU  
HOME MENU  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
Home Menu.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock disc’ then  
2
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc  
‘On’ or ‘Off’.  
Name’ > ‘Next Screen’.  
Disc Setup  
Disc Setup  
On  
Off  
Basic  
Input Disc Name  
Lock Disc  
Input Disc Name  
Lock Disc  
Next Screen  
Basic  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
Optimize HDD  
125  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 126 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
14  
The Disc Setup menu  
Set to On to prevent accidental recording,  
editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you  
need to unlock the disc to make edits, select  
Off.  
Finalize settings  
Finalize  
Initialize settings  
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW  
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so  
that the disc can be played on a regular DVD  
player or computer equipped with a suitable  
DVD-ROM drive.  
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW  
disc for either VR mode or Video mode  
recording.  
It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs.  
This is only necessary if you want to a player  
to display a title menu for the disc.  
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc,  
it will be automatically initialized for  
recording according to the DVD-RW Auto  
Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see  
page 140).  
See Playing your recordings on other DVD  
players on page 68 for detailed instructions.  
Undo Finalize  
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode  
recording when you load them, but it is also  
possible to initialize them for VR mode  
DVD-RW  
1
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW  
discs recorded on this recorder in Video  
mode. You need to do this if you want to  
record more material or edit material already  
recording.  
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be  
initialized as a way of erasing the entire disc.  
When initializing a DVD-RAM disc, select VR  
mode.  
on the disc.  
You can also undo the finalization of VR  
mode discs which have been finalized on  
other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc  
the message This disc cannot be recorded.  
Undo the finalization is displayed, use this  
command to be able to record on the disc  
using this recorder.  
See Initializing recordable DVD discs on  
page 70 for detailed instructions.  
HOME MENU  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo  
Finalize’ then ‘Start’.  
Note  
1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also,  
once recorded in Video mode, the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording.  
126  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 127 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
14  
The Disc Setup menu  
Optimize HDD  
Initialize HDD  
HDD  
HDD  
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the  
HDD file system gradually becomes  
fragmented. Periodically, the HDD will need  
optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented  
files.  
When your DVD recorder is working without  
a problem this option is not visible in the  
Disc Setup menu. However, if the HDD file  
system becomes corrupted for some reason,  
you can initialize the HDD to fix the problem.  
Note that initializing the HDD will erase all  
the data on it.  
When the HDD needs optimizing the  
recorder will automatically display a  
message recommending optimization.  
HOME MENU  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
Important  
• Optimizing the HDD can take as long as  
eight hours. During optimization,  
playback and recording are not possible.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ then  
‘Start’.  
• Canceling optimization mid-way does  
not undo the optimization already done,  
so the HDD will be partly optimized.  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Basic  
Initialize HDD  
Initialize  
Finalize  
HOME MENU  
InitializeHDD
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then  
‘Start’.  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Basic  
Optimize HDD  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
A progress bar indicates how long there is  
left to go.  
127  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 128 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
15  
The Video Adjust menu  
Chapter 15  
The Video Adjust menu  
Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up  
the picture quality for the built-in tuner and  
external inputs, for disc playback, and for  
recording.  
• Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch  
between the built-in TV tuner and the  
external inputs (DVR-645H-S only: not  
possible if you selected DV Video  
Setting in step 2 (above)).  
• Use the PREV/ꢐ NEXT buttons to  
change the channel of the built-in TV  
tuner.  
Setting the picture quality  
for TV and external inputs  
There are six presets available:  
Tuner – suitable for general TV  
broadcasts  
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of  
picture quality settings for the built-in TV  
tuner and for each external input. There are  
several preset settings that suit various  
sources, or you can create up to three of your  
own sets.  
VCR – suitable for video cassettes  
DTV/LDP – suitable for digital  
broadcasts and Laserdiscs  
Memory1 – user preset 1  
Memory2 – user preset 2  
Memory3 – user preset 3  
Choosing a preset  
HOME MENU  
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual  
settings for the current preset (Tuner, VCR  
or DTV/LDP).  
1
With the recorder stopped,  
press to display the Home Menu.  
ENTER  
Creating your own set  
There are three user presets in which you  
can save your own set of picture quality  
settings.  
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.  
DVR-645H-S only: Select the DV input by  
selecting DV then DV Video Setting  
from the Home Menu.  
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and  
select one of the user presets (Memory 1,  
2 or 3).  
ENTER  
Select a preset.  
Pr 1  
ENTER  
Tuner  
2
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.  
Detailed Settings  
Pr 1  
Memory1  
Detailed Settings  
128  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 129 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
15  
The Video Adjust menu  
Black Setup – Corrects the standard  
reference black level (NTSC video input  
only).  
ENTER  
3
Select the setting you want to  
adjust.  
Hue – Adjusts overall balance between  
red and green.  
Memory1  
Pr  
1
Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the  
colours appear.  
Prog. Motion  
PureCinma  
3-D Y/C  
Motion  
Still  
Auto1  
Motion  
Off  
Still  
Max  
Max  
ENTER  
YNR  
4
Adjust the currently selected  
CNR  
Off  
White AGC  
White Level  
Off  
setting.  
Min  
Max  
HOME MENU  
5
Press to exit.  
You can now use the preset for any other  
input or the built-in TV tuner.  
You can adjust the following settings:  
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and  
still picture quality when video output is  
set to progressive.  
Tip  
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the  
picture for film material when the video  
output is set to progressive. Usually set  
to Auto, but try switching to Off if the  
picture appears unnatural.  
• To see more of the picture as you adjust  
different settings, press ENTER after  
selecting the setting you want to adjust.  
• 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness /  
colour separation (NTSC video input  
only).  
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the Y  
(brightness) component.  
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour)  
component.  
White AGC – Turn on for automatic  
1
white level adjustment.  
White Level – Adjusts the intensity of  
white.  
Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of  
black.  
Note  
1 When White AGC is On, the White Level setting can’t be adjusted.  
129  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 130 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
15  
The Video Adjust menu  
Creating your own set  
Setting the picture quality  
for disc playback  
There are three user presets in which you  
can save your own set of picture quality  
settings for disc playback.  
This setting determines how the picture will  
look when playing discs.  
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and  
select one of the user presets (Memory 1,  
2 or 3).  
Choosing a preset  
2
Move the cursor down and select  
HOME MENU  
‘Detailed Settings’.  
1
With a disc playing (or paused),  
press to display the Home Menu.  
Memory1  
Detailed Settings  
ENTER  
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.  
Select a setting.  
3
Select the picture quality setting you  
want to adjust.  
ENTER  
Memory1  
Prog. Motion  
PureCinma  
Subtitle Adjust  
YNR  
Motion  
Still  
Auto1  
On  
TV  
Detailed Settings  
Off  
Off  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
CNR  
There are six presets available:  
BNR  
Off  
TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray  
tube TVs  
MNR  
Min  
PDP – suitable for plasma display  
screens  
You can adjust the following settings:  
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and  
still picture quality when video output is  
set to progressive. (Prog. Motion is  
Professional – suitable for professional  
monitors  
Memory1 – user preset 1  
Memory2 – user preset 2  
Memory3 – user preset 3  
ineffective when PureCinema is On.)  
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the  
picture for film material when the video  
output is set to progressive. Usually set  
to Auto 1 but try switching to Auto 2,  
On or Off if the picture appears  
unnatural.  
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual  
settings for the current preset (TV, PDP or  
Professional).  
130  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 131 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
15  
The Video Adjust menu  
• Subtitle Adjust – When the video  
output is set to progressive scan, it’s  
possible that the subtitles in some  
movies will disappear unnaturally. In this  
case select the On setting (only possible  
when connected using HDMI).  
4
Use the ꢃ/ꢀ buttons to adjust the  
currently selected picture quality setting.  
5
When you have all the settings as you  
want them, press HOME MENU to exit.  
YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the Y  
(brightness) component.  
Tip  
• To see more of the picture as you adjust  
different settings, press ENTER after  
selecting the setting you want to adjust.  
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour)  
component (only possible when  
connected using HDMI).  
• YNR and Detail are ineffective for analog  
and component video when the Video  
Priority Mode is set to HDMI. Set to  
Component to make effective for both  
analog and HDMI video. See page 143.  
• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the block noise  
(artefacts visible in areas of flat colour,  
caused by MPEG compression).  
MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the mosquito  
noise (artefacts visible around the edges  
of an image, caused by MPEG  
compression).  
Sharpness – Adjusts the sharpness of  
the high-frequency (detailed) elements  
in the picture.  
Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges  
appear.  
White Level – Adjusts the intensity of  
white.  
Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of  
black.  
Black Setup – Corrects the standard  
reference black level (NTSC video  
playback on the Interlace video output  
setting only). (Black Setup is ineffective  
for HDMI output.)  
Gamma Correction – Adjusts the  
brightness of darker images.  
Hue – Adjusts overall balance between  
red and green.  
Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the  
colours appear.  
131  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 132 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
16  
The Initial Setup menu  
Chapter 16  
The Initial Setup menu  
Using the Initial Setup menu  
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture,  
language and so on.  
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and  
recording these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.  
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of  
inactivity.  
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.  
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Basic  
Clock Setting  
Auto  
Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and  
the clock will be set automatically.  
Manual •  
If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal  
in your area, you can set the time and date manually.  
The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.  
Input Line System  
525 System  
Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external  
input.  
625 System •  
Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.  
See also About the input line system on page 144 for more information on this setting.  
Power Save  
Mode 1  
Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed  
through to the antenna output when the recorder is  
in standby.  
Mode 2  
Off •  
No input signals are passed through to the outputs  
when the recorder is in standby.  
When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving  
at the SCART and antenna inputs are passed along  
to the outputs.  
132  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 133 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
16  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
On •  
Explanation  
HELP Setting  
Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI  
displays.  
Off  
Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI  
displays. (Press HELP on the remote to manually  
display the Help screen.)  
Pause Live TV  
TV’s Tuner •  
Allows you to use the Pause Live TV feature with an  
AV Link-compatible TV connected by SCART cable.  
Recorder’s Tuner Allows you to use Pause Live TV with this recorder’s  
internal TV tuner.  
See also Pause Live TV on page 61 for more information on this setting.  
Setup Navigator  
Start  
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also Switch-  
ing on and setting up on page 32.  
Tuner  
Auto Channel  
Setting  
Auto Scan  
Select your country and then wait for the recorder to  
auto tune into channels in your area. After auto scan  
has finished, the channel mapping screen appears  
showing which channels have been assigned to  
which program numbers. You can skip unwanted  
channels using the Manual CH Setting option below.  
Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping  
screen.  
Download from  
TV  
If your TV supports this feature you can download all  
the channels that your TV is tuned to via the SCART  
input. Select your country and then wait for the  
download to complete. After the download is com-  
plete, the channel mapping screen appears, as  
above.  
See also the operating instructions that came with  
your TV for more information.  
133  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 134 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
16  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Manual CH Setting Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any  
of the settings made by auto tuning. Select your  
country, then proceed to the manual channel setting  
screen:  
• Change channel presets using the PREV/ꢐ  
NEXT buttons.  
To skip the displayed channel (because there is no  
station assigned to that channel), change the Skip  
setting to On.  
• Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel  
system of your country or region.  
• Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want  
to assign to the current channel preset.  
To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT  
setting to Off then adjust the Level setting.  
• Set the Sound System setting to match the sound  
system of your region.  
• The Name field allows you to input a name of up to  
five characters for the current channel preset.  
• If the currently selected channel is scrambled  
requiring a decoder connected to the AV2 (INPUT 1/  
DECODER), set the Decoder setting to On.  
Channel Swapping Next Screen  
Video In/Out  
Proceed to the next screen to swap channel  
assignments of different presets so that you can  
group together presets that naturally go together.  
Select two presets to swap then press ENTER.  
Input Colour  
System  
Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour  
system for the external input and the built-in TV  
tuner. Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to change the  
preset. On the default Auto setting the recorder can  
generally correctly detect whether the input signal is  
PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PAL-60, but in some  
cases you may have to set it manually if the picture is  
displayed incorrectly.  
See also About the input colour system on page 145 for more information on this setting.  
134  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 135 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
16  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Component Video Interlace •  
Out  
Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with  
progressive-scan video.  
Progressive  
Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan  
compatible. Check the operating instructions that  
came with your monitor/TV if you’re not sure.  
For Component Video Out to be effective, the AV1 Out setting (see below) must be set to something other than RGB.  
If your TV is incompatible with progressive scan video and you select Progressive, you will not be able to see any  
picture at all. In this case, press (PLAY) while holding down the (STOP) button on the front panel to  
switch to Interlace (this also switches Screen Resolution on page 142 to the default setting).  
When an HDMI device is connected and Video Priority Mode is set to HDMI, the Component Video Out setting is  
automatically set to Interlace.  
AV1 Out  
Video •  
S-Video  
RGB  
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to standard  
composite video (compatible with all TVs).  
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to S-video.  
Recommended if you are using a long SCART cable.  
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to RGB. Good  
quality but check your TV for compatibility. Note that  
on this setting signals from the built-in tuner and  
from external inputs is not output when the recorder  
is in TV mode.  
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case  
either switch off and reconnect using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on  
page 160).  
The Component Video Out setting (see above) has no effect when AV1 Out is set to RGB.  
AV2/L1 In  
Video •  
S-Video  
RGB  
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to  
standard composite video.  
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to  
S-video.  
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to  
RGB.  
Decoder  
Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the  
AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector. For  
scrambled channels, make sure that the channel  
Decoder setting is set to On. (See Manual CH Setting  
page 134.)  
When the Input Line System is set to 525 System, RGB cannot be selected.  
Even when set to RGB. depending on the connected device, the input signal may be composite video.  
135  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 136 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
16  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
On •  
Explanation  
NTSC on PAL TV  
NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.  
Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.  
Off  
Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating  
instructions that came with your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 145 for related information.  
Audio In  
NICAM Select  
NICAM •  
Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.  
Regular Audio  
Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.  
(You can still switch the audio to record using the  
AUDIO button before recording.)  
Tuner Level  
Normal •  
Standard setting.  
Compression  
Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is  
excessive, causing distortion.  
External Audio  
Stereo •  
Bilingual  
Select if the audio from the currently selected  
external input is standard stereo.  
Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.  
DVR-645H-S only – When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio  
tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.  
Bilingual Recording A/L •  
Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source  
when recording to HDD with HDD Recording Format  
set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode or in  
LPCM mode, from an external source.  
B/R  
As above, but for right (B) channel recording.  
When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format  
set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you  
want on playback.  
DV Input  
(DVR-645H-S only)  
Stereo 1 •  
Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during  
the video shoot) from a camcorder that supports two  
stereo audio tracks.  
Stereo 2  
Mix  
Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a  
camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.  
Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the  
two stereo audio tracks.  
136  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 137 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
16  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Audio Out  
Dolby Digital Out  
Dolby Digital •  
Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital  
source is being played.  
Dolby Digital Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output.  
PCM  
On •  
Off  
Use if your connected equipment doesn’t have a  
Dolby Digital decoder.  
DTS Out  
Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being  
played.  
Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is  
being played. Use when your connected equipment  
doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this case, use the  
analog audio outputs.  
96 kHz PCM Out  
MPEG Out  
96 kHz 48 kHz • Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz  
output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t  
support 96 kHz sampling rate.  
96 kHz  
Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is  
being played.  
MPEG  
Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using  
MPEG audio is being played.  
MPEG PCM •  
Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM  
output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t  
have an MPEG audio decoder.  
Audio DRC  
On  
Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control).  
Use when listening to Dolby Digital material at low  
volume.  
Off •  
Switches off Audio DRC.  
Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby  
Digital.  
137  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 138 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
16  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Language  
OSD Language  
English •  
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to  
English.  
available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the on-  
screen displays.  
Audio Language  
English •  
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video  
playback to English.  
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the  
default audio language for DVD-Video playback.  
Other  
Select to set the default audio language to  
something other than the ones listed. See Selecting  
other languages for language options on page 145.  
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language  
preference.  
Subtitle Language English •  
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video  
playback to English.  
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the  
default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback.  
Other  
Select to set the default subtitle language to  
something other than the ones listed. See Selecting  
other languages for language options on page 145.  
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle  
Language preference.  
Auto Language  
On •  
On this setting:  
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your  
default language will play using that language,  
without subtitles.  
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default  
language but that have a subtitle track in your default  
language will play the original audio track with  
subtitles.  
Off  
Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your  
audio and subtitle language preferences.  
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same  
language.  
138  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 139 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
16  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
DVD Menu  
Language  
w/Subtitle  
Language •  
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same  
as that set for the subtitle language.  
English  
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.  
available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the  
default language for DVD-Video menus.  
Other  
Select to set the DVD menu language to something  
other than the ones listed. See Selecting other  
languages for language options on page 145.  
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.  
Subtitle Display  
On •  
Select to have discs display subtitles according to  
your Subtitle Language and Auto Language  
preferences.  
Off  
Select to switch off subtitle display.  
Assist Subtitle  
Select to display special additional assistive  
subtitles, where available.  
Some discs may override these settings.  
Recording  
Manual Recording On (go to setup) All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to  
MN32 and LPCM modes can be set.  
Off •  
Justthestandardrecordingmodes(XP,SP,LP, EP,SLP  
and SEP) can be set.  
See also Manual recording modes on page 147 for detailed information on manual recording levels.  
Optimized Rec  
On  
The recording quality of timer recordings is  
automatically adjusted to fit on to the selected media  
if it will not fit at the selected quality setting. If the  
recording will not fit even at MN1(MN4 for DVD+R/  
+RW), then the recording will start at MN1 and stop  
when all the available space is used up.  
Off •  
When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the  
selected media, the recording starts but is cut off  
when no more recording is possible.  
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be  
used together with VPS/PDC.  
139  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 140 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
16  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Set Thumbnail  
0 seconds •  
Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc  
Navigator to the first frame of the title.  
30 seconds  
3 minutes  
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into  
the title.  
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 3 minutes into  
the title.  
Auto Chapter  
(Video)  
No Separation  
10 minutes •  
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.  
When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are  
inserted every 10 minutes.  
15 minutes  
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.  
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs.  
Auto Chapter  
(DVD+R/+RW)  
No Separation  
10 minutes •  
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.  
When recording in DVD+R/+RW, chapter markers  
are inserted every 10 minutes.  
15 minutes  
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.  
DVD-RW Auto Init. VR Mode •  
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode  
recording when loaded into the recorder for the first  
time.  
Video Mode  
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for Video mode  
recording.  
HDD Recording  
Format  
Video Mode Off Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode.  
Use this setting if you don’t need to transfer the  
recording later to a Video mode DVD.  
Video Mode On • Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with  
Video mode recordings. This setting is convenient if  
you want to transfer the recording to a Video mode  
DVD as high-speed copy can be used.  
When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual  
broadcast. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on  
playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 136.  
140  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 141 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
16  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Playback  
TV Screen Size  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the  
letter box format presentation for widescreen  
material.  
4:3 (Pan & Scan) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the  
pan and scan presentation for widescreen material.  
16:9 •  
Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV  
settings determine how 4:3 material will look.  
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that  
format as some discs override this setting.  
Still Picture  
Field  
Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.  
Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake.  
Frame  
Auto •  
Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still  
image.  
Seamless Playback On  
Off •  
Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the  
accuracy of the edit points.  
You may notice momentary interruption at edited  
points during playback of a VR mode Play List.  
This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback.  
Parental Lock  
Set Password  
In order to change the parental lock level or change  
the country/area code, set the password using this  
option. From the following screen, enter a four-digit  
number that will be your password.  
Change Password In order to change the password, first enter your  
existing password and then a new one from the  
following screen.  
Change Level  
From the following screen, first enter your password  
and then set a parental lock level.  
Country/Area  
Code  
From the following screen, first enter your password  
and then set a country/area code. See Country/Area  
code list on page 157.  
Only certain discs have parental lock and country/area code features. Check the disc packaging to see what features  
the disc has. If you forget your password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See  
Resetting the recorder on page 160.  
141  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 142 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
16  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
On •  
Explanation  
Angle Indicator  
A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle  
scenes on a DVD-Video disc.  
Off  
Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle  
scene is showing.  
HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected)  
Screen Resolution  
1920 x 1080i  
1280 x 720p  
720 x 576p  
Constant 1920 x 1080i output.  
Constant 1280 x 720p output.  
Constant 720 x 576p output (for use with the 625  
input line system).  
720 x 480p  
720 x 576i  
720 x 480i  
Constant 720 x 480p output (for use with the 525  
input line system).  
Constant 720 x 576i output (for use with the 625 input  
line system).  
Constant 720 x 480i output (for use with the 525 input  
line system).  
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case,  
press (PLAY) while holding down the (STOP) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also  
switches Component Video Out on page 135 to the default setting).  
4:3 Video Output  
Full  
Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the  
aspect ratio.  
Normal  
Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change  
the aspect ratio. 4:3 video will be shown with bars on  
each side (unless the Screen Resolution setting  
(above) is set to 720 x 480i or 720 x 576i).  
Colour  
RGB (0–255)  
RGB (16–235)  
YCbCr 4:2:2  
Use if colours are weak and black appears to ‘float’  
on the RGB (16–235) setting.  
Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the  
black too deep on the RGB (0–255) setting.  
The video signal is output as a 10-bit YCbCr 4:2:2  
component signal. This is the standard setting for  
HDMI-compatible devices.  
YCbCr 4:4:4  
The video signal is output as a 8-bit YCbCr 4:4:4  
component signal.  
• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available.  
• When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available.  
142  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 143 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
16  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
Options  
Auto •  
Explanation  
Audio Output  
Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as  
a bitstream signal. However, depending on the  
Audio Out setting, number of audio channels, and  
the HDMI-connected device, Linear PCM audio may  
be output.  
PCM  
All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM  
(except DTS).  
Bitstream Priority Select if the connected device is compatible with  
bitstream audio.  
This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected.  
Video Priority Mode HDMI • Select for high quality picture output on a connected  
HDMI display. However, on this setting the YNR and  
Detail picture quality settings are not effective for  
analog video, and component video will be set to  
interlaced.  
Component  
Select if you want the YNR and Detail picture quality  
settings to be effective for both HDMI and analog  
video output, or if Component Video Out is set to  
Progressive while an HDMI display is connected  
(page 135).  
When watching video on an HDMI display, use the  
HDMI setting.  
Options  
On Screen Display On •  
The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play,  
etc.) on-screen.  
Off  
Switches off the on-screen operation displays.  
Front Panel Display On •  
The time is shown in the front panel display when the  
recorder is in standby.  
Off  
The front panel display is switched off in standby  
(although it still lights dimly when setting a timer  
recording).  
Remote Control  
Mode  
Recorder 1–3  
If you are using more than one recorder in the same  
(default: Recorder 1) room, set them to different IDs. This setting sets the  
recorder ID; to change the remote controller ID,  
press and hold RETURN then press 1, 2 or 3 to set.  
The remote will only control a recorder with the same  
ID.  
143  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 144 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
16  
The Initial Setup menu  
Setting  
AV. Link  
Options  
Explanation  
This Recorder  
Only •  
Signals received through the AV input when the  
recorder is in standby are not passed through to the  
AV output.  
Pass Through  
Signals received when in standby are passed though  
to the output for connected devices. (Note that  
during EPG data download, the EPG data is not  
passed through.)  
When set to Pass Through, make sure to set Power Save (page 132) to Off.  
DivX VOD  
Registration Code Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code.  
See DivX video compatibility on page 10 and DivX®  
VOD content on page 11.  
Set Preview  
(HDD only)  
Quick Preview • When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video  
plays short excerpts from throughout the selected  
title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally  
from the beginning.)  
Normal  
The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the  
title.  
• If, when the Input Line System setting is  
changed, the screen goes blank (due to  
incompatibility with your TV), you can  
switch back by pressing and holding the  
front panel STOP button then pressing  
OPEN/CLOSE (also front panel) while  
the recorder is stopped.  
Additional information about the  
TV system settings  
About the input line system  
This recorder is compatible with PAL,  
SECAM, 3.58 NTSC and PAL-60 TV systems.  
The Input Line System and Input Colour  
System settings determine how the recorder  
treats incoming video signals from an  
external input or the built-in TV tuner.  
• When you switch the Input Line System  
setting the Copy List is erased. If you  
switch the setting using the STOP  
button and OPEN/CLOSE buttons as  
described above, there is no  
Please note the following points when  
changing the input line system:  
confirmation, so please use with care.  
• When the current input is a built-in tuner  
channel preset, changing the input line  
system will usually also affect the input  
line system of the AV2 (INPUT 1/  
DECODER) input. However if the AV2/L1  
In setting is set to Decoder, then the L2  
input is affected instead.  
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV  
line systems on the same disc.  
• When you change this setting, the Input  
Colour System setting also changes  
(see below).  
144  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 145 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
16  
The Initial Setup menu  
displayed on your TV. If this happens, press  
About NTSC on PAL TV  
and hold the STOP button on the front  
panel, then press PLAY. This will set the  
recorder’s video output back to Interlace.  
Depending on the Input Line System setting  
and the NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal  
format output when the recorder is stopped  
varies as shown in the table below.  
Output  
when  
stopped  
Selecting other languages  
for language options  
Input Line  
System  
NTSC on PAL  
TV  
625 System  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
PAL  
PAL  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Other’ from the  
525 System  
NTSC  
PAL–60  
language list.  
This option appears in the settings for DVD  
Menu Language, Audio Language, and  
Subtitle Language.  
About the input colour system  
The available options of the Input Colour  
System setting depend on the Input Line  
System setting. The table below shows the  
different options available.  
ENTER  
2
Select the language you  
want.  
Input Line  
System  
External  
input  
Built-in tuner  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
OSD DVD Menu Language  
Tuner  
Audi
Language  
English  
625 System  
Auto  
PAL  
Auto  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Subt
0
1
4
Number  
Auto
5
Audio Out  
Language
Recording  
Playback  
DVD
Subt
PAL  
SECAM  
n/a  
SECAM  
Auto  
525 System  
• Select by language name: Use the ꢃ/ꢀ  
buttons to change the language.  
3.58 NTSC  
PAL–60  
• Select by code number: Press then  
use the number buttons to enter the  
four-digit language code.  
Additional information about  
component video output  
If you switch the Component Video Out  
setting to Progressive when using a TV that  
is not compatible with progressive-scan  
video, you will not be able to see anything  
See Language code list on page 157 for a list  
of available languages and corresponding  
codes.  
145  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 146 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Chapter 17  
Additional information  
Minimum copying times  
The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.  
1
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. Check with the disc  
manufacturer for compatibility.  
DVD disc type  
DVD-R / 4x  
DVD-RW / 4x  
DVD+R / 4x  
DVD+RW / 4x  
DVD-R / 8x / 16x  
DVD-RW / 6x  
DVD+R / 8x / 16x  
DVD+RW / 8x  
DVD-RW / 2x  
DVD-R DL  
DVD-RAM / 2x  
DVD+R / 2.4x  
DVD+RW / 2.4x DVD-RAM / 5x  
DVD+R DL  
DVD-RAM / 3x  
Rec  
mode  
DVD-R / 1x  
DVD-RW / 1x  
1x  
2x  
2.4x  
*1  
3x  
4x  
6x  
SEP 10 h  
SLP 8 h  
EP 6 h  
LP 4 h  
SP 2 h  
XP 1 h  
6 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
10 mins.  
15 mins.  
30 mins.  
60 mins.  
3 mins.  
4 mins.  
5 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
15 mins.  
30 mins.  
2 mins.  
2.5 mins.  
3.5 mins.  
5 mins.  
10 mins.  
20 mins.  
1.5 mins.*1 1.25 mins.*1  
2 mins.*1 1.6 mins.*1  
2.5 mins.*1 2.2 mins.*1  
*1  
*1  
6.3 mins.  
12.5 mins.  
25 mins.  
4 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
15 mins.  
3 mins.  
5.5 mins.  
11 mins.  
Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc  
being recorded.  
*1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied.  
Note  
1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may  
be made at 2x speed).  
146  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 147 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Manual recording modes  
The table below shows the approximate recording times for the HDD and the different DVD  
types in each manual recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents.  
Video mode On (HDD)  
Video mode Off (HDD)  
Video mode (DVD),  
VR mode (DVD)  
DVD+R/+RW  
Resolution*1  
Resolution*1  
Level  
Rec. time  
Level  
Rec. time  
MN 1 *2,3  
MN 2 *2,3  
MN 3 *2,3  
MN 4 *3  
MN 5 *3  
MN 6 *3  
MN 7  
MN 1  
MN 2  
MN 3  
MN 4  
MN 5  
MN 6  
802 mins.  
720 mins.  
600 mins.  
480 mins.  
420 mins.  
360 mins.  
802 mins.  
720 mins.  
600 mins.  
480 mins.  
420 mins.  
360 mins.  
SEP  
SLP  
352 x 240 /  
352 x 288  
352 x 240 /  
352 x 288  
EP  
LP  
352 x 480 / MN 7  
300 mins.  
270 mins.  
240 mins.  
230 mins.  
220 mins.  
210 mins.  
200 mins.  
190 mins.  
180 mins.  
170 mins.  
160 mins.  
150 mins.  
140 mins.  
130 mins.  
120 mins.  
110 mins.  
105 mins.  
100 mins.  
95 mins.  
90 mins.  
85 mins.  
80 mins.  
75 mins.  
70 mins.  
65 mins.  
61 mins.  
61 mins.  
300 mins. 352 x 480 /  
352 x 576  
352 x 576  
MN 8  
MN 9  
MN 8  
MN 9  
270 mins.  
240 mins.  
230 mins.  
220 mins.  
210 mins.  
200 mins.  
190 mins.  
180 mins.  
170 mins.  
160 mins.  
150 mins.  
140 mins.  
130 mins.  
120 mins.  
110 mins.  
105 mins.  
100 mins.  
95 mins.  
90 mins.  
85 mins.  
80 mins.  
75 mins.  
70 mins.  
65 mins.  
61 mins.  
61 mins.  
480 x 480 /  
480 x 576  
MN 10  
MN 11  
MN 12  
MN 13  
MN 14  
MN 15  
MN 16  
MN 17  
MN 18  
MN 19  
MN 20  
MN 21  
MN 22  
MN 23  
MN 24  
MN 25  
MN 26  
MN 27  
MN 28  
MN 29  
MN 30  
MN 31  
MN 32  
LPCM  
MN 10  
MN 11  
MN 12  
MN 13  
MN 14  
MN 15  
MN 16  
MN 17  
MN 18  
MN 19  
MN 20  
MN 21  
MN 22  
MN 23  
MN 24  
MN 25  
MN 26  
MN 27  
MN 28  
MN 29  
MN 30  
MN 31  
MN 32  
LPCM  
544 x 480 /  
544 x 576  
720 x 480 /  
720 x 576  
SP  
720 x 480 /  
720 x 576  
XP  
*1 The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.  
*2 Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW.  
*3 Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW.  
147  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 148 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality.  
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is  
in Linear PCM format.  
When recording to the HDD, recording for the times given will use approximately 4.7 GB of HDD space  
(equivalent to one recordable DVD).  
• See also Recording on page 55.  
Troubleshooting  
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is  
something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the  
trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical  
appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below,  
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.  
General  
Problem  
Remedy  
The disc is  
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7).  
automatically ejected • Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-  
after closing the disc  
tray  
side up).  
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 159).  
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder.  
Can’t play a disc  
• Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 7).  
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 159).  
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-  
side up).  
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for  
an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate.  
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a  
Line System different to the current recorder setting.  
• DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy-  
once protected recordings will not play in this recorder.  
Can’t record a disc  
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7).  
• Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been  
initialized (page 70). This can take up to 1 hour.  
148  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 149 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Problem  
Remedy  
No picture  
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 14).  
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to  
the correct input.  
• The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible  
TV. Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel STOP  
button then pressing PLAY.  
All settings are reset  
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the  
recorder is on, all the settings will be lost.  
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before  
unplugging the power cord.  
Remote control does  
not work  
• If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the  
CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to  
use (page 14).  
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder  
(page 143). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is  
automatically reset to Recorder1.)  
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 6).  
• Replace the batteries (page 6).  
No sound or sound is  
distorted  
• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and  
the volume turned up.  
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or  
slow motion play. Press PLAY to resume regular playback.  
• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS  
decoder or DTS compatible amp/receiver. If you have connected a  
suitable decoder, also make sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out >  
DTS Out setting is On.  
• Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In  
this case, switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog.  
• Check the audio cable connections (page 14).  
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.  
Cannot switch a bilin- • During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels.  
gual program  
The main and sub channels are both output.  
The picture from the  
external input is  
distorted  
• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected,  
you cannot connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly  
to your TV.  
The picture is distorted • Change the Input Line System setting (page 144). (You can also  
change it by pressing the STOP button and OPEN/CLOSE on the  
front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.)  
149  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 150 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Problem  
Remedy  
Screen is stretched  
vertically or  
• Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 141) is correct for  
the kind of TV you have (see also page 158).  
horizontally  
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.  
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically  
according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not  
compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the  
connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video.  
Can’t play a disc  
recorded using this  
recorder on another  
player  
• If the disc was recorded in Video mode or DVD+R, make sure that  
it’s finalized (page 68).  
•Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when  
recorded in Video mode and finalized.  
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be  
specifically RW compatible in order to play it (page 7).  
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-  
CPRM compatible players (page 57).  
• DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded  
material may not play on other players. Finalize the disc and try again.  
During playback the  
picture is dark or dis-  
torted  
• When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not  
display correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.  
Can’t record or does  
• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.  
not record successfully • For a Video mode disc or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t already  
finalized.  
• Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc:  
– HDD: 999 titles  
– VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc  
– Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title  
– DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254  
chapters per disc)  
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.  
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 125).  
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC,  
etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc  
must be in the same TV system. When recording to the HDD, it is also  
necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match what you want  
to record (page 144).  
• The power may have failed during recording.  
150  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 151 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Problem  
Remedy  
Timer program doesn’t • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the  
record successfully  
recorder’s built-in TV tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.  
• When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once  
protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-  
once material (page 57).  
Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the  
earlier one will record completely.  
• The power may have failed during recording.  
After briefly unplug-  
• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other  
ging or after a power settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder. After  
failure the front panel unplugging or a power failure, the battery keeps all settings for a  
display shows ‘--:--’  
period of several minutes. Reset the clock and other recorder settings  
to use the recorder again.  
Front panel display  
shows ‘LOCK’ when a  
button is pressed  
• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 65).  
Can’t use One Touch  
Copy (HDD to DVD)  
• Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some  
free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc.  
Also make sure that for a Video mode disc or a DVD+R, the disc isn’t  
finalized.  
• Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some  
free space for recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc.  
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of  
remaining recordable titles may not decrease.  
• Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that  
there isn’t a disc menu on the disc you’re trying to use.  
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once  
protected, One Touch Copy will not work.  
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over 8 hours long when  
copying to DVD+R/+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL).  
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP titles  
when copying to DVD+R/+RW.  
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to  
DVD.  
Can’t use One Touch  
Copy (DVD to HDD)  
• Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there  
are fewer than 999 titles on the HDD.  
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to  
the HDD.  
151  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 152 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Problem  
Remedy  
The picture freezes and • Press STOP then try restarting playback.  
the front panel and  
• Press the front panel STANDBY/ON button to switch the power  
remote control buttons off, then switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to  
stop working  
switch off, press and hold STANDBY/ON for 5 seconds until the  
power switches off.  
A device connected via • Check that it is a device that may be connected to this unit (digital  
USB does to function. camera, USB memory, memory card reader or printer).  
DVR-645H-S only  
• Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length.  
• Check that the USB cable is inserted fully.  
• Check that the USB device is powered on.  
• Only the first digital camera, USB memory or memory card reader  
connected is readable by this unit. Unplug multiple devices and  
connect the device you want to use first.  
HDMI  
Problem  
Remedy  
The connected HDMI or • Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the  
DVI device does not  
display any picture  
(and the front panel  
HDMI indicator does  
not light)  
power of both components is on).  
• Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on.  
• Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next,  
switch on the HDMI/DVI device and leave it for around 30 seconds,  
then switch on this recorder.  
• When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the  
following:  
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.  
– The cable you’re using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a non-  
standard cable may result in no picture being output.  
– Don’t use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single  
cable to connect devices together.  
• When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the  
following:  
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.  
– The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible.  
– The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x  
720p, 1920 x 1080i) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i)  
video input.  
• If the recorder’s internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no  
HDMI output.  
• Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder.  
152  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 153 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Problem  
Remedy  
No video from the  
HDMI output.  
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not  
be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press (PLAY) while  
holding down the (STOP) button on the front panel to switch the  
setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 135 to the  
default setting).  
There’s no sound from • There is no sound when using a DVI terminal.  
the connected HDMI or • Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with  
DVI device.  
the manual that came with the connected device).  
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect  
the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
On-screen displays and recorder displays  
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the  
recorder and an explanation of their meaning.  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• Initializing disc. Please wait a  
moment.  
When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc,  
the recorder automatically initializes it.  
• Incompatible region number.  
The disc loaded has an incompatible region  
number for the recorder and so will not play.  
• Cannot record any more titles.  
• No more space for file management  
data.  
The disc control data limit has been reached, or  
the maximum number of chapters and/or titles  
has been reached. Erase titles/chapters or  
combine chapters.  
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo  
the finalization.  
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD  
recorder. Undo the finalization in order to  
recording/editing.  
153  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 154 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• Cannot play this disc.  
• This disc cannot be recorded.  
• Cannot read the CPRM information.  
• Could not record the information to  
the disc.  
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the  
disc, clean it and retry. If the error persists, use a  
new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc,  
please consult a Pioneer Service Center.  
• Cannot edit.  
• Could not initialize disc.  
• Could not complete finalization  
successfully.  
• Could not undo finalization  
successfully.  
• Could not successfully unlock the  
disc.  
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.  
The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This  
display may also appear if the disc is dirty or  
damaged.  
• Cannot record to a disc that is not  
CPRM compatible.  
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR  
mode DVD-R/-RW disc with CPRM for recording.  
• Cannot record this content using  
Video mode recording.  
• This video cannot be recorded to  
DVD+R/+RW.  
• This content is copy protected.  
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be  
recorded.  
• Incorrect CPRM information.  
The recorder could not read the CPRM  
information. The recorder may be damaged—  
please consult a Pioneer Service Center.  
• Repairing disc.  
• Repairing the HDD.  
During recording, the power was cut. This display  
appears when the power is restored.  
• Could not repair the disc.  
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a  
power cut. The contents of the recording will be  
lost.  
• Overheating has stopped operation.  
Press DISPLAY to clear message.  
The internal temperature of the recorder has  
exceeded the operating limit. If this message  
reappears, please contact a Pioneer authorized  
service center.  
154  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 155 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• HDD optimization is recommended.  
This can be done using Disc Setup.  
The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD  
housekeeping) to maintain playback and recording  
performance.  
• Please perform HDD optimization.  
This can be done using Disc Setup.  
The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in  
order to maintain performance.  
• The HDD has not been sufficiently  
optimized. Please optimize again.  
If this message appears repeatedly after  
optimizing the HDD it is likely that there is not  
enough free space on the HDD for optimization to  
complete properly. Please erase some titles from  
the HDD and optimize again.  
• This channel’s TV system is different  
from the recorder’s setting.  
The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current  
channel is different from the TV system settings of  
this recorder.  
• Recording failed due to a TV system  
mismatch. Press DISPLAY to clear  
message.  
The timer recording failed because the TV system  
of the channel set for recording was different from  
the setting of the recorder.  
• Playback has stopped because the TV During recording or timer recording standby, the  
system is different than the recording. TV System (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the playback video  
changed, causing playback to stop automatically.  
• There is no DV input or the input sig- No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may  
nal is unrecordable.  
appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in  
the connected camcorder.  
• No DV camcorder connected.  
The camcorder is not connected properly, or the  
camcorder is switched off.  
You cannot connect more than one  
DV camcorder at a time.  
This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to  
just one camcorder.  
• Cannot operate the DV camcorder.  
This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder.  
Try switching off the camcorder then turn it back  
on again.  
• Could not operate the DV camcorder. This recorder was not able to operate the DV  
camcorder.  
• The DV camcorder is not set for play- The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to  
back. Please select playback mode on  
the DV camcorder.  
playback mode.  
155  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 156 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• Searching for a printer. Please wait a This message is displayed when the recorder is  
moment. To cancel, press ENTER.  
scanning for a connected printer, or when the  
printer is not yet ready for printing. If there is no  
printer connected, please connect one.  
If the message does not disappear, try  
disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable.  
(Note that this recorder may not work correctly  
with all printers.)  
• The printer is not ready or is not  
connected. Please check the printer.  
This message is displayed when communication  
could not be established with the printer. See the  
Troubleshooting section if you do not know the  
cause.  
• Printing has been canceled because ... This message is displayed when there is a printer  
error during printing. After checking the printer for  
the cause of the error, either reconnect the printer  
and start the printing job again, or select "Yes" to  
resume printing (select "No" to cancel the print  
job). See also the operating instructions that came  
with your printer for possible causes of print  
errors.  
156  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 157 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Language code list  
Language (Language code letter), Language code  
Japanese (ja), 1001  
English (en), 0514  
French (fr), 0618  
German (de), 0405  
Italian (it), 0920  
Spanish (es), 0519  
Chinese (zh), 2608  
Dutch (nl), 1412  
Portuguese (pt), 1620  
Swedish (sv), 1922  
Russian (ru), 1821  
Korean (ko), 1115  
Greek (el), 0512  
Bhutani (dz), 0426  
Esperanto (eo), 0515  
Estonian (et), 0520  
Basque (eu), 0521  
Persian (fa), 0601  
Finnish (fi), 0609  
Fiji (fj), 0610  
Faroese (fo), 0615  
Frisian (fy), 0625  
Kirghiz (ky), 1125  
Latin (la), 1201  
Lingala (ln), 1214  
Laotian (lo), 1215  
Lithuanian (lt), 1220  
Latvian (lv), 1222  
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908  
Sinhalese (si), 1909  
Slovak (sk), 1911  
Slovenian (sl), 1912  
Samoan (sm), 1913  
Shona (sn), 1914  
Somali (so), 1915  
Albanian (sq), 1917  
Serbian (sr), 1918  
Siswati (ss), 1919  
Sesotho (st), 1920  
Sundanese (su), 1921  
Swahili (sw), 1923  
Tamil (ta), 2001  
Telugu (te), 2005  
Tajik (tg), 2007  
Thai (th), 2008  
Tigrinya (ti), 2009  
Turkmen (tk), 2011  
Tagalog (tl), 2012  
Setswana (tn), 2014  
Tonga (to), 2015  
Turkish (tr), 2018  
Tsonga (ts), 2019  
Malagasy (mg), 1307  
Maori (mi), 1309  
Macedonian (mk), 1311  
Malayalam (ml), 1312  
Mongolian (mn), 1314  
Moldavian (mo), 1315  
Marathi (mr), 1318  
Malay (ms), 1319  
Maltese (mt), 1320  
Burmese (my), 1325  
Nauru (na), 1401  
Nepali (ne), 1405  
Norwegian (no), 1415  
Occitan (oc), 1503  
Oromo (om), 1513  
Oriya (or), 1518  
Irish (ga), 0701  
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704  
Galician (gl), 0712  
Guarani (gn), 0714  
Gujarati (gu), 0721  
Hausa (ha), 0801  
Hindi (hi), 0809  
Croatian (hr), 0818  
Hungarian (hu), 0821  
Armenian (hy), 0825  
Interlingua (ia), 0901  
Interlingue (ie), 0905  
Inupiak (ik), 0911  
Indonesian (in), 0914  
Icelandic (is), 0919  
Hebrew (iw), 0923  
Yiddish (ji), 1009  
Javanese (jw), 1023  
Georgian (ka), 1101  
Kazakh (kk), 1111  
Greenlandic (kl), 1112  
Cambodian (km), 1113  
Kannada (kn), 1114  
Kashmiri (ks), 1119  
Kurdish (ku), 1121  
Afar (aa), 0101  
Abkhazian (ab), 0102  
Afrikaans (af), 0106  
Amharic (am), 0113  
Arabic (ar), 0118  
Assamese (as), 0119  
Aymara (ay), 0125  
Azerbaijani (az), 0126  
Bashkir (ba), 0201  
Byelorussian (be), 0205  
Bulgarian (bg), 0207  
Bihari (bh), 0208  
Bislama (bi), 0209  
Bengali (bn), 0214  
Tibetan (bo), 0215  
Breton (br), 0218  
Catalan (ca), 0301  
Corsican (co), 0315  
Czech (cs), 0319  
Panjabi (pa), 1601  
Polish (pl), 1612  
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Tatar (tt), 2020  
Quechua (qu), 1721  
Rhaeto-Romance (rm),  
1813  
Kirundi (rn), 1814  
Romanian (ro), 1815  
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823  
Sanskrit (sa), 1901  
Sindhi (sd), 1904  
Sangho (sg), 1907  
Twi (tw), 2023  
Ukrainian (uk), 2111  
Urdu (ur), 2118  
Uzbek (uz), 2126  
Vietnamese (vi), 2209  
Volapük (vo), 2215  
Wolof (wo), 2315  
Xhosa (xh), 2408  
Yoruba (yo), 2515  
Zulu (zu), 2621  
Welsh (cy), 0325  
Danish (da), 0401  
Country/Area code list  
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter  
Argentina, 0118, ar  
Australia, 0121, au  
Austria, 0120, at  
Belgium, 0205, be  
Brazil, 0218, br  
Canada, 0301, ca  
Chile, 0312, cl  
Finland, 0609, fi  
France, 0618, fr  
Germany, 0405, de  
Hong Kong, 0811, hk  
India, 0914, in  
Indonesia, 0904, id  
Italy, 0920, it  
Japan, 1016, jp  
Malaysia, 1325, my  
Mexico, 1324, mx  
Netherlands, 1412, nl  
New Zealand, 1426, nz  
Norway, 1415, no  
Pakistan, 1611, pk  
Philippines, 1608, ph  
Portugal, 1620, pt  
Singapore, 1907, sg  
Spain, 0519, es  
Sweden, 1905, se  
Switzerland, 0308, ch  
Taiwan, 2023, tw  
Thailand, 2008, th  
United Kingdom, 0702, gb  
USA, 2119, us  
China, 0314, cn  
Denmark, 0411, dk  
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr  
Russian Federation, 1821, ru  
157  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 158 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Screen sizes and disc formats  
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor  
Screen format of disc Setting  
Appearance  
16:9  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
The program is shown in widescreen with  
black bars at the top and bottom of the  
screen.  
The sides of the program are cropped so that  
the picture fills the whole screen.  
4:3  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
The program is presented correctly on either  
setting.  
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor  
Screen format of disc Setting  
Appearance  
16:9  
16:9  
The program is presented in widescreen.  
4:3  
16:9  
Your TV will determine how the picture is  
presented—check the manual that came  
with the TV for details.  
158  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 159 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Handling discs  
When holding discs of any type, take care  
not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on  
the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or  
by the center hole and edge.  
For more detailed care information see the  
instructions that come with discs.  
Do not load more than one disc into the  
recorder.  
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback  
and recording performance. Take care also  
not to scratch the label side of the disc.  
Although not as fragile as the recorded side,  
scratches can still result in a disc becoming  
unusable.  
Damaged discs  
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder.  
If you can see that a disc is cracked,  
chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged,  
don't risk using it; you could end up  
damaging the recorder.  
Should a disc become marked with  
fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft,  
dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the  
center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with  
a circular motion.  
This recorder is designed for use with  
conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of  
shaped discs is not recommended for this  
product. Pioneer disclaims all liability  
arising in connection with the use of shaped  
discs.  
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol,  
or a commercially available CD/DVD  
cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly.  
Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning  
agents, including products designed for  
cleaning vinyl records.  
Storing discs  
Cleaning the pickup lens  
Although CDs and DVD discs are more  
durable than vinyl records, you should still  
take care to handle and store discs correctly.  
When you're not using a disc, return it to its  
case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs  
in excessively cold, humid, or hot  
environments (including under direct  
sunlight).  
The DVD recorder’s lens should not become  
dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it  
should malfunction due to dust or dirt,  
consult your nearest Pioneer-authorized  
service center. Although lens cleaners are  
commercially available, we do not  
recommend using them since some may  
damage the lens.  
Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the  
disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other  
sharp-tipped writing instrument. These  
could all damage the disc.  
159  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 160 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
Condensation  
Use in a kitchen or other room where the  
recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam.  
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover  
with cloth—this may prevent proper cooling  
of the unit.  
Condensation may form inside the recorder  
if it is brought into a warm room from  
outside, or if the temperature of the room  
rises quickly. Although the condensation  
won’t damage the recorder, it may  
temporarily impair its performance. For this  
reason you should leave it to adjust to the  
warmer temperature for about an hour  
before switching on and using.  
Place on an unstable surface, or one that  
is not large enough to support all four of the  
unit’s feet.  
Moving the recorder  
If you need to move the recorder, first  
remove the disc, if loaded, and close the disc  
tray. Next, press STANDBY/ON to switch  
the power to standby, checking that the  
POWER OFF indication in the display goes  
off. Wait at least two minutes. Lastly,  
disconnect the power cord. Never lift or  
move the unit during playback or  
Hints on installation  
We want you to enjoy using this unit for  
years to come, so please bear in mind the  
following points when choosing a suitable  
location for it:  
recording—discs rotate at a high speed and  
may be damaged.  
Do...  
Use in a well-ventilated room.  
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such  
as a table, shelf or stereo rack.  
Resetting the recorder  
Don’t...  
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to  
all its factory settings.  
Use in a place exposed to high  
temperatures or humidity, including near  
radiators and other heat-generating  
appliances.  
1
Make sure that the recorder is on.  
2
Using the front panel controls, press  
Place on a window sill or other place  
and hold STOP and press STANDBY/  
ON.  
where the recorder will be exposed to direct  
sunlight.  
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.  
Use in a dusty or damp environment or  
in a room where it will be exposed to  
excessive cigarette smoke.  
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or  
other component in your stereo system that  
becomes hot in use.  
Use near a television or monitor as you  
may experience interference—especially if  
the television uses an indoor antenna.  
160  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 161 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM  
Specifications  
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h  
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h  
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h  
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h  
(DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only)  
Manual Mode (MN)  
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 13 h  
DVD+R/+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 8 h  
General  
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz  
Power consumption  
DVR-645H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 W  
DVR-545H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 W  
Power consumption in standby mode . . . . . . . 0.61 W  
(Front panel display: off)  
DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL  
Weight  
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m  
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 3 h 35 m  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 7 h 11 m  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h 46 m  
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 21 m  
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . Approx. 17 h 57 m  
(DVD-R DL only)  
Manual Mode (MN)  
DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h  
DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m  
DVR-645H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 kg  
DVR-545H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 kg  
Dimensions . .420 mm (W) x 69 mm (H) x 318 mm (D)  
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C  
Operating humidity . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation)  
TV system. . . PAL/SECAM/NTSC (external input only)  
Readable discs  
DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW,  
DVD-RAM, Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW  
(WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA, DivX)  
Recording discs and formats  
DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode  
DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode  
Timer  
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs  
Clock . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)  
DVD-RAM: VR mode  
DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode  
DVD+R DL: +VR mode  
Tuner  
Receivable channels  
Video recording format  
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MHz  
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG  
Audio recording format  
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz  
Compression format . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM  
(uncompressed)  
SECAM B/G  
PAL I  
Frequency  
PAL B/G  
Frequency  
47 MHz to 89 MHz  
Channel  
Channel  
VHF (low)  
VHF (high)  
E2 to E4  
X to Z  
44 MHz to 89 MHz  
A to C  
X to Z  
104 MHz to 300 MHz E5 to E12  
S1 to S20  
104 MHz to 300 MHz  
D to J  
11, 13  
S1 to S20  
M1 to M10  
U1 to U10  
Recording time  
HDD  
Hyper  
UHF  
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41  
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69 470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69  
DVR-645H-S (250 GB)  
SECAM D/K  
SECAM L  
PAL D/K  
Fine (XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 53 h  
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 h  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 319 h  
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 425 h  
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 532 h  
Manual Mode (MN). . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 53 h to 711 h  
DVR-545H-S (160 GB)  
Channel  
Frequency  
Frequency  
49 MHz to 94 MHz  
Channel  
FB, FC1, FC  
VHF (low)  
VHF (high)  
49 MHz to 65 MHz  
R1 to R5  
F1 to F6  
B to Q  
104 MHz to 300 MHz  
104 MHz to 300 MHz R6 to R12  
S1 to S20  
STEREO  
B/G - A2  
I - NICAM  
L - NICAM  
B/G - NICAM  
D/K - NICAM  
Hyper  
UHF  
300 MHz to 470 MHz  
470 MHz to 862 MHz  
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41  
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69  
S21 to S41  
21 to 69  
Fine (XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h  
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 h  
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 272 h  
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 340 h  
Manual Mode (MN). . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h to 455 h  
161  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 162 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)  
AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector  
This connector provides the video and audio signals  
for connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.  
Input/Output  
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VHF/UHF set 75 (IEC connector)  
Video input  
. . . . . . . . . AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front), Input 3 (rear)  
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )  
Jacks  
. .AV connector (Input 1), RCA jack (Input 2, Input 3)  
Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output  
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1)  
RCA jack (Output)  
PIN no.  
AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER)  
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out  
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in  
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in  
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out  
6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in  
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in  
4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GND  
17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GND  
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in  
19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out  
20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in  
8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status  
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GND  
S-Video input  
. . . . . . . . . AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front), Input 3 (rear)  
Y (luminance) - Input level. . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )  
C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (Input 1),  
4 pin mini DIN (Input 2, Input 3)  
S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output  
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )  
C (colour) - Output level. . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1),  
4 pin mini DIN (Output)  
Component video output  
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 )  
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks  
RGB input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV2 (Input 1)  
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (Input 1)  
RGB output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1  
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1)  
Audio input  
Supplied accessories  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
G-LINK™ cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
RF antenna cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Operating Instructions  
. . . . . .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front), Input 3 (rear) L/R  
Input level  
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
During audio input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms  
(Input impedance: more than 22 k)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (Input 1),  
RCA jacks (Input 2)  
Note: The specifications and design of this product are  
subject to change without notice, due to improvement.  
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output  
During audio output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms  
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 k)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1),  
RCA jacks (Output)  
®
This product includes FontAvenue fonts licenced  
by NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered  
trademark of NEC Corporation.  
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack  
Digital audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Coaxial  
G-LINK™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack  
DV input (DVR-645H-S only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin (front)  
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)  
USB (DVR-645H-S only). . Type A (front), Type B (front)  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 pin  
162  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVR645H_WY_EN.book 163 ページ 2006年7月5日 水曜日 午前10時25分  
17  
Additional information  
163  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Philips DVD Player DV900VHS01 User Manual
Philips DVD Recorder DVDR7260H 05B User Manual
Philips Electric Shaver 7110X User Manual
Philips Power Supply PM2811 User Manual
Pinnacle Speakers Network Router Lightning 1000 User Manual
Plantronics Bluetooth Headset Plantronics Explorer 210 Series User Manual
Polycom IP Phone 1725 16844 001 User Manual
Powermate Portable Generator PM0435250 User Manual
Powermate Portable Generator PM052531201 User Manual
ProForm Home Gym PFEX25121 User Manual